2018 Nissan Altima Sedan | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA Owner

User Manual: Pdf 2018 Nissan Altima Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 467

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2018

ALTIMA SEDAN
OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

Owner’s Manual Supplement
The information contained within this supplement updates the following
information in the 2017 NISSAN Sentra, 2017 NISSAN Altima, 2018 NISSAN
Sentra and 2018 NISSAN Altima Owner’s Manual.
• “NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats)” section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Read carefully and keep in vehicle.
Printing: November 2017
Publication No.: SU18EA 0OCSU0

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, please observe the following
items.
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
pocket.
∙ Make sure that there is nothing pressing against the rear of the seatback,
such as a child restraint installed in
the rear seat or an object stored on
the floor.
∙ Make sure that there is no object
placed under the front passenger
seat.
∙ Make sure that there is no object
placed between the seat cushion and
center console or between the seat
cushion and the door.

∙ If a forward facing child restraint is
installed in the front passenger seat,
do not position the front passenger
seat so the child restraint contacts the
instrument panel. If the child restraint
does contact the instrument panel,
the system may determine the seat is
occupied and the passenger air bag
may deploy in a collision. Also the
front passenger air bag status light
may not illuminate. For additional information about installing and using
child restraints, refer to "Child restraints" in this section.
∙ Confirm the operating condition with
the front passenger air bag status
light.
∙ If you notice that the front passenger
air bag status light is not operating as
described in this section, get the occupant classification system checked.
It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Until you have confirmed with a
dealer that your passenger seat occupant classification system is working
properly, position the occupants in
the rear seating positions.

∙ Do not position the front passenger
seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the
front seat does contact the rear seat,
the air bag system may determine a
sensor malfunction has occurred and
the front passenger air bag status
light may illuminate and the supplemental air bag warning light may
flash.
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and
front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements
under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in
Canada. However, all of the information,
cautions and warnings in this manual
still apply and must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air
bag is located in the center of the steering
wheel. The front passenger supplemental
front-impact air bag is mounted in the
dashboard above the glove box. The front
air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity frontal collisions, although they
may inflate if the forces in another type of
collision are similar to those of a higher
severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle

damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
monitors information from the crash zone
sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat
belt buckle sensors and occupant classification sensor (weight sensor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For
the front passenger, the occupant classification sensor is also monitored. Based on
information from the sensor, only one front
air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on
the crash severity and whether the front
occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag may be
automatically turned off under some conditions, depending on the weight detected
on the front passenger seat and how the
seat belt is used. If the front passenger air
bag is OFF, the front passenger air bag status light will be illuminated. For additional
information, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section. One
front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air
bag system, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information

about the system. If you are considering
modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of
this Owner’s Manual.

crease the risk of injury if the occupant is
too close to, or is against, the front air bag
module during inflation.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud
noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a
breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.

The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the face and chest of the front occupants.
They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air
bag may cause facial abrasions or other
injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and front passenger seated upright
as far as practical away from the steering
wheel or instrument panel. The front air
bags inflate quickly in order to help protect
the front occupants. Because of this, the
force of the front air bag inflating can in-

The front air bags deflate quickly after a
collision.

After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

WRS0475

The front passenger air bag is designed
to automatically turn OFF under some
conditions. Read this section carefully
to learn how it operates. Proper use of
the seat, seat belt and child restraints is
necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in
this manual concerning the use of
seats, seat belts and child restraints can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.

CONDITION

DESCRIPTION

Empty

Empty front passenger seat
Bag or Child or Child Restraint or
Small Adult in front passenger seat
Adult in the front passenger seat

Nobody/Somebody
Adult

In addition to the above, certain objects
placed on the front passenger seat may
also cause the light to operate as described above depending on their weight.

PASSENGER AIR BAG STA)
TUS LIGHT (
ON (illuminated)

Status light
The front passenger seat is equipped with
an occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor) that turns the front passenger air
bag on or off depending on the weight applied to the front passenger seat. The status of the front passenger air bag (ON or
OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air
bag status light
which is located on
the instrument panel.
After the ignition switch is placed in the
"ON" position, the front passenger air bag
status light on the instrument panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off or remains illuminated depending on
the front passenger seat occupied status.
The light operates as follows:
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS
INHIBITED

ON (illuminated)

INHIBITED

OFF (dark)

ACTIVATED

For additional information related to the
normal operation and troubleshooting of
this occupant classification sensor system,
please refer to “Normal operation” and
“Troubleshooting” in this section.

Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S. regu-

lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,
it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag
and other air bags in your vehicle are not
part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help
reduce the risk of injury or death from an
inflating air bag to certain front passenger
seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned
OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the
requirements.
The occupant classification sensor in this
vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to
detect an occupant and objects on the
seat by weight. For example, if a child is in
the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn
the front passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child
restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, its weight and the
child’s weight can be detected and cause
the air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who
are properly seated and using the seat belt
as outlined in this manual should not
cause the front passenger air bag to be
automatically turned OFF. For small adults
it may be turned OFF, however if the occu-

pant takes his/her weight off the seat
cushion (for example, by not sitting upright,
by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by
otherwise being out of position), this could
cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.
Always be sure to be seated and wearing
the seat belt properly for the most effective
protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and
children be properly restrained in a rear
seat. NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster
seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If
this is not possible, the occupant classification sensor is designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger
air bag OFF for specified child restraints as
required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the
ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or
move in a collision or sudden stop. This can
also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. For
additional information about proper use
and installation, refer to “Child restraints” in
this section.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied,
the front passenger air bag is designed not
to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects

placed on the seat could result in air bag
inflation, because of the object’s weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air
bag inflation, such as if a child is standing
on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this
manual. Always be sure that you and all
vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status
light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
front passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),
it could be that the person is a small adult,
or is not sitting on the seat properly or not
using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front
seat, the front passenger air bag status
light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the
type of child restraint being used. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash),
it could be that the child restraint or seat
belt is not being used properly. Make sure
that the child restraint is installed properly,

the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air bag
status light is still not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear
seat.
If the front passenger air bag status light
will not illuminate even though you believe
that the child restraint, the seat belts and
the occupant are properly positioned, it is
recommended that you take your vehicle
to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can
check system status by using a special
tool. However, until you have confirmed
with a dealer that your air bag is working
properly, reposition the occupant or child
restraint in a rear seat.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and
front passenger air bag status light will
take a few seconds to register a change in
the front passenger seat status. This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air
, located in the mebag warning light
ter and gauges area of the instrument
panel, will be illuminated (blinking or
steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Normal operation
In order for the occupant classification
sensor system to classify the front passenger based on weight, please follow the precautions and steps outlined below:
Precautions
∙ Make sure that there are no objects
weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on
the seat or placed in the seatback
pocket.
∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other
object is not pressing against the rear
of the seatback.
∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not
pushing or pulling on the back of the
front passenger seat.
∙ Make sure that the front passenger
seat or seatback is not forced back
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ Make sure that there is no object placed
under the front passenger seat.

Steps
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”
section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered
on the seat cushion with your feet comfortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your
lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the
“Seat belts” section of this manual.
Front passenger seat belt buckle status is monitored by the occupant classification system, and is used as an input to determine occupancy status. So,
it is highly recommended that the front
passenger fasten their seat belt.
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds
allowing the system to classify the
front passenger before the vehicle is
put into motion.
5. Ensure proper classification by checking the front passenger air bag status
light.

NOTE:
This vehicle’s occupant classification
sensor system generally keeps the classification locked during driving, so it is
important that you confirm that the
front passenger is properly classified
prior to driving. However, the occupant
classification sensor may recalculate the
weight of the occupant under some conditions (both while driving and when
stopped), so front passenger seat occupants should continue to remain seated
as outlined above.
Troubleshooting

However, if the occupant is not a small
adult, then this may be due to the following
conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered on
the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.

If you think the front passenger air bag
status light is incorrect:

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.

1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying
the front passenger seat:

∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat.

∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag
light is functioning as intended. The
front passenger air bag is suppressed.

∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console or between
the seat cushion and the door.

∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright,
leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her
feet comfortably extended to the floor.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

∙ The child restraint is not properly installed, as outlined in the “Child restraints” section of this manual.

This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:

∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)
hanging on the seat or placed in the
seatback pocket.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat.
∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still OFF after this, the small
adult, child or child restraint should be repositioned in the rear seat and the vehicle
should be checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger and no objects on the front passenger seat, the vehicle should be
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
Other supplemental front-impact air
bag precautions

WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument
panel. Also, do not place any objects
between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such
objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air
bags inflate.
∙ Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will
be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This
is to prevent accidental inflation of
the supplemental air bag or damage
to the supplemental air bag system.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.
∙ Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to
the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and
above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material
around the air bag system.
∙ Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of
the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

∙ Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as
seat covers, on the seat that are not
specifically designed to assure proper
air bag operation. Additionally, do not
stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and
seatback. Such objects may interfere
with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor).
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect
the front air bag system. Tampering
with the seat belt system may result
in serious personal injury.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the front air bag system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for installation of electrical
equipment. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical
test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the air bag
system.
∙ A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield
could affect the function of the
supplemental air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the front air
bag system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.

FOREWORD
This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many
miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.
Please read through this manual before
operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties
covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance
and schedules” section of this manual
explains details about maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a
separate Customer Care/Lemon Law
Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with
your vehicle, and clarify your rights under your state’s lemon law.
When you require any service or have any
questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to
assist you with the extensive resources
available to them.
In addition to factory-installed options,
your vehicle may also be equipped with
additional accessories installed prior to delivery. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped. It is important that you
familiarize yourself with all disclosures,

READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
warnings, cautions and instructions concerning proper use of such accessories
prior to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure
familiarity with controls and maintenance
requirements assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING
IMPORTANT
REMINDERS!

SAFETY

INFORMATION

Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
∙ NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for
conditions.
∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that
could distract you.
∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the
rear seat.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

∙ ALWAYS provide information about
the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.
∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification
could
affect
its
performance, safety, emissions or durability and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage
or
performance
problems
resulting from modifications may not
be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for example remote insurance company
monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,
telematics or engine reprogramming,
may cause interference or damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of any aftermarket
OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically
approved by NISSAN. The vehicle warranty may not cover damage caused by
any aftermarket plug-in device.

This manual includes information for all features and equipment available on this model.
Features and equipment in your vehicle may
vary depending on model, trim level, options
selected, order, date of production, region or
availability. Therefore, you may find information about features or equipment that are
not included or installed on your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the
time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to
change specifications, performance, design
or component suppliers without notice and
without obligation. From time to time,
NISSAN may update or revise this manual to
provide Owners with the most accurate information currently available. Please carefully read and retain with this manual all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to
ensure you have access to accurate and upto-date information regarding your vehicle.
Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals
and any updates can also be found in the
Owner section of the NISSAN website at
https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/
navigation/manualsGuide. If you have
questions concerning any information in
your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. For contact information, refer
to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
page in this Owner’s Manual.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING

You will see various symbols in this manual.
They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce
the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.

CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause minor or
moderate personal injury or damage to
your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,
the procedures must be followed
carefully.

APD1005

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do
this” or “Do not let this happen.”
If you see a symbol similar to these in an
illustration, it means the arrow points to
the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these call attention to an item in the illustration.

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive
harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products
of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including
engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your
vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle.
For
more
information
go
to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material.
The following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. For additional information, refer to
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon.
SiriusXM® services
require a
subscription after
trial period and are
sold separately or
as a package. The
satellite service is
available only in
the 48 contiguous
USA and DC.
SiriusXM® satellite
service is also
available in
Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca.

© 2017 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your
NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service
needs.
However, if there is something that your
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or
you would like to provide NISSAN directly
with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask
for the following information:

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

– Your name, address, and telephone
number

For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
or via e-mail at:
nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

– Vehicle identification number (attached
to the top of the instrument panel on the
driver’s side)
– Date of purchase

For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122

– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR

For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
information.centre@nissancanada.com
If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)
or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of
Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3
Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4
Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1.
2.
3.

Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-23)
Rear seat belts (P. 1-12)
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag
(P. 1-44)
4. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-44)
5. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-8)
6. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s)
and shoulder height adjuster
(P. 1-12, 1-44)
7.
Side-impact pressure sensor
(driver’s side shown; passenger’s
side similar) (P. 1-44)
8. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-44)
9. Front seats (P. 1-2)
10. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) (P. 1-44)
11. Rear seats (P. 1-2)
12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) system (P. 1-23)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LIC3922

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR FRONT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

7.
8.
9.

Power windows (P. 2-49)
Windshield (P. 8-19)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-34)
Engine hood (P. 3-23)
Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-35)
Daytime running light system
(Type A) (if so equipped) (P. 2-35)
Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-35)
Daytime running light system
(Type B) (if so equipped) (P. 2-35)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26)
Tire pressure (P. 8-31)
Flat tire (P. 6-3)
Tire chains (P. 8-31)
Mirrors (P. 3-30)
Door locks (P. 3-4)
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (P. 3-7)
Keys (P. 3-2)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII2378

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR REAR
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
(P. 2-35)
Trunk lid (P. 3-24)
Rearview camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-3)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26)
Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-26)
Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)
Fuel-filler door (P. 3-26)
Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-4)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII2379

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.

Power moonroof (if so equipped)
(P. 2-52)
Sun visors (P. 3-29)
Interior lights (P. 2-54)
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
(if so equipped) (P. 2-56)
Rearview mirror (P. 3-30)
Glove box (P. 2-45)
Cup holders (P. 2-45)
Console box (P. 2-45)
Rear armrest (P. 1-2)
Cup holders (P. 2-45)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII2380

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.

2.
3.

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

LIC3763

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

12.
13.
14.

Instrument brightness control
(P. 2-35)
Trip computer reset switch (P. 2-3)
Vents (P. 4-11)
Headlight/fog light (if so
equipped)/turn signal switch
(P. 2-35)
Driver supplemental air bag
(P. 1-44)
Horn (P. 2-40)
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
Warning and indicator lights
(P. 2-10)
Vehicle information display (P. 2-18)
Paddle shifters (if so equipped)
(P. 5-14)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-34)
Hazard warning flasher switch
(P. 6-2)
Front passenger air bag status
light (P. 1-44)
Navigation system*
(if so equipped)
Front passenger supplemental air
bag (P. 1-44)
Glove box (P. 2-45)
Power outlet (P. 2-43)
Heater and air conditioner (P. 4-13)

15.
16.

17.
18.

19.
20.

21.
22.

Shift lever (P. 5-14)
USB connection port
(if so equipped) (P. 4-24)
Aux jack (P. 4-24)
Push-button ignition switch
(P. 5-9)
Cruise control main/set switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-41)
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-43)
Bluetooth® Hands-free Phone
System (P. 4-2, 4-54)
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
controls (P. 3-28)
Vehicle information display
controls (P. 2-18)
Steering wheel switch for audio
control (P. 4-48)
Hood release (P. 3-23)
Trunk opener (P. 3-24)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-42)
Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-42)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

*: For additional information, refer to the
separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
QR25DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Power steering fluid reservoir
(P. 8-11)
Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)
Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)
Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)
Air cleaner (P. 8-18)
Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-21)
Battery (P. 8-14)
Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)
Radiator cap (P. 8-5)
Drive belt location (P. 8-16)
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-13)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LDI2111

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

VQ35DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LDI2112

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning
light

Name

Page

Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light

2-11

Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) system
warning light

2-11

Brake warning
light

2-11

Warning
light

Indicator
light

Name

Page

Name

Page

Overdrive OFF
indicator light (if
so equipped)

2-17

Security indicator
light

2-17

Side light and
headlight indicator light (green)

2-17

Slip indicator light

2-17

2-15

Turn signal/
hazard indicator
lights
Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light

2-17

Power steering
warning light

2-14

Seat belt warning
light and chime

2-15

Supplemental air
bag warning light

2-15

Name

Page

Front fog light indicator light (if so
equipped)

2-15

Front passenger
air bag status
light

Charge warning
light

2-12

Low tire pressure
warning light

2-12

High beam indicator light (blue)

2-16

2-14

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

2-16

Master warning
light

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Indicator
light

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front manual seat adjustment
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Front power seat adjustment
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Center armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Adjustable head restraint/headrest
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Non-adjustable head restraint/
headrest components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Three-point type seat belt with
retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Seat belt extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using the seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Precautions on SRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . .1-61
Supplemental air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . 1-62

SEATS

∙ Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or
make the vehicle move. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.

ARS1152

WARNING
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the seat
should be upright. Always sit well
back and upright in the seat with both
feet on the floor and adjust the seat
properly. For additional information,
refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section.
∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the
seat to make sure it is securely locked.

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
driving so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation. The seat may
move suddenly and could cause loss
of control of the vehicle.
∙ The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort.
Seat belts are most effective when the
passenger sits well back and straight
up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap
belt and being injured is increased.

CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined
in this section.
LRS2571

LRS2572

Forward and backward

Reclining

Pull the center of the bar up and hold it
while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the
bar to lock the seat in position.

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up
and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever up and lean your body
forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can
be reclined to allow occupants to rest
when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in the P (Park) position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

LRS2573

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to
adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved.

LRS2662

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
(if so equipped)
Operating tips
WARNING
Before driving the vehicle, return the
seatback to an upright seating position
after manually releasing it. Also, make
sure the seat is locked in place. Failure
to do so may cause the seat to move in a
collision or sudden stop. This may result
in damage to the seat or personal
injury.

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ The power seat motor has an autoreset overload protection circuit. If the
motor stops during operation, wait
30 seconds then reactivate the switch.
∙ Do not operate the power seat switch
for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.

Forward and backward
Moving the switch as shown will slide the
seat forward or backward to the desired
position.

Reclining
Move the recline switch as shown until the
desired angle is obtained.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can
be reclined to allow occupants to rest
when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in the P (Park) position.
LRS2636

Type A (if so equipped)

LRS2784

Type B (if so equipped)

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)
Move the switch as shown to adjust the
angle (if so equipped) and height of the
seat cushion.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

1. Move the front passenger seat to the
most forward position.
2. Open the access cover on the rear parcel shelf.
1 on the
3. Push down on the button 䊊
rear parcel shelf.

4. Fold down the passenger’s side seat2 .
back 䊊

WARNING
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the
cargo area or on the rear seat when it
is in the fold-down position. Use of
these areas by passengers without
proper restraints could result in serious injury or death in an accident or
sudden stop.

LRS2270

Lumbar support (if so equipped
for driver’s seat)
The lumbar support feature provides adjustable lower back support to the driver.
Push the switch as shown to adjust the
seat lumbar area.
WRS0166

FOLDING REAR SEAT
Interior trunk access
The trunk can be accessed from the driver
side and passenger side of the rear seat for
loading and unloading, as shown.

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in
an accident or sudden stop.
∙ Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously
injured. Keep the car locked, with the
rear seatback and trunk lid securely
latched when not in use, and prevent
children’s access to car keys.

LRS2168

To fold down the driver’s side of the rear
seat, open the trunk and pull on the strap
1 .
䊊

WRS0167

CENTER ARMREST
Pull the armrest down as shown.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS
∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests
have multiple notches along the stalk(s)
to lock them in a desired adjustment
position.

WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They
may provide additional protection
against injury in certain rear end collisions.
Adjustable
head
restraints/headrests must be adjusted
properly, as specified in this section.
Check the adjustment after someone
else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint/headrest
stalks
or
remove
the
head
restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat
if the head restraint/headrest has been
removed. If the head restraint/headrest
was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before
an occupant uses the seating position.
Failure to follow these instructions can
reduce the effectiveness of the head
restraints/headrests. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision.

∙ The non-adjustable head restraints/
headrests have a single locking notch
to secure them to the seat frame.
∙ Proper Adjustment:

LRS2695

The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped
with
head
restraints/headrests.
䉱 Indicates the seating position
equipped with a head restraint.

䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped
with a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not
equipped with a head restraint or headrest
(if applicable).
∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

– For the adjustable type, align the
head restraint/headrest so the center of your ear is approximately level
with the center of the head
restraint/headrest.
– If your ear position is still higher than
the recommended alignment, place
the head restraint/headrest at the
highest position.
∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been
removed, ensure that it is reinstalled
and locked in place before riding in that
designated seating position.

LRS2300

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest

LRS2299

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD
RESTRAINT/HEADREST
COMPONENTS

LRS2302

REMOVE
Use the following procedure to remove the
head restraint/headrest:

2. Multiple notches

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

3. Lock knob

2. Single notch

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to
the highest position.

4. Stalks

3. Lock knob

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

4. Stalks

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest
from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest
properly in a secure place so it is not
loose in the vehicle.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position.

LRS2303

INSTALL
1. Align the head restraint/headrest
stalks with the holes in the seat. Make
sure that the head restraint/headrest is
facing the correct direction. The stalk
1 must be
with the notch (notches) 䊊
installed in the hole with the lock knob
2 .
䊊
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/
headrest before an occupant uses the
seating position.

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0134

ADJUST
For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the
center is level with the center of your ears. If
your ear position is still higher than the
recommended alignment, place the head
restraint/headrest at the highest position.

LRS2351

LRS2305

LRS2306

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

Raise

Lower

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it
up.

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and
push the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

SEAT BELTS

SSS0136

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted and you are sitting upright and
well back in your seat with both feet on the
floor, your chances of being injured or killed
in a collision and/or the severity of injury
may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly
encourages you and all of your passengers
to buckle up every time you drive, even if
your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
driven.

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0016

WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times. Children should be in the
rear seats and in an appropriate
restraint.

SSS0134

WARNING
∙ The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so
may reduce the effectiveness of the
entire restraint system and increase
the chance or severity of injury in an
accident. Serious injury or death can
occur if the seat belt is not worn
properly.

SSS0014

WARNING
∙ Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck.
The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug
as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT
THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high
could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle.
∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
∙ Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
∙ If the seat belt warning light glows
continuously while the ignition is
turned ON with all doors closed and all
seat belts fastened, it may indicate a
malfunction in the system. Have the
system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ No changes should be made to the
seat belt system. For example, do not
modify the seat belt, add material, or
install devices that may change the
seat belt routing or tension. Doing so
may affect the operation of the seat
belt system. Modifying or tampering
with the seat belt system may result
in serious personal injury.

∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have
activated, they cannot be reused and
must be replaced together with the
retractor. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any collision. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NISSAN recommends that all seat belt
assemblies in use during a collision be
replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage
and continue to operate properly.
Seat belt assemblies not in use during
a collision should also be inspected
and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
∙ All child restraints and attaching
hardware should be inspected after
any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints
should be replaced if they are
damaged.

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0786

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT
Both the driver’s and passenger’s front
seats are equipped with a seat belt warning light. The warning light, located on the
instrument panel, will show the status of
the driver and passenger seat belt.
NOTE:
The front passenger seat belt warning
light will not light up if the seat is not
occupied.

For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.

PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant
women use seat belts. The seat belt should
be worn snug and always position the lap
belt as low as possible around the hips, not
the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never run
the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal
area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons
use seat belts. Check with your doctor for
specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times. Children should be in the
rear seats and in an appropriate
restraint.
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the
seat belt becomes wrapped around a
child’s neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts
and becomes tight. This can occur
even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle
the seat belt to release the child. If the
seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is
already unbuckled, release the child
by cutting the seat belt with a suitable
tool (such as a knife or scissors) to
release the seat belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

LRS2571

Manual front seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2662

Power front seat shown (if so equipped)

Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. For additional information, refer to “Seats” in this section.

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and
passengers some freedom of movement
in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or
during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks
the seat belt for child restraint installation.

LRS2674

LRS2675

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the
A until you hear and feel the
buckle 䊊
latch engage.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and
B as shown.
snug on the hips 䊊

∙ The retractor is designed to lock
during a sudden stop or on impact.
A slow pulling motion permits the
seat belt to move and allows you
some freedom of movement in the
seat.
∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulled
from its fully retracted position,
firmly pull the belt and release it.
Then smoothly pull the belt out of
the retractor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward
C .
the retractor to take up extra slack 䊊
Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over
your shoulder and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear
seating positions’ three-point seat belts
have two modes of operation:
∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat
belt cannot be extended again until the
seat belt tongue is detached from the
buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt
fully retracts. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR
mode should not be activated. If it is activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat
belt tension. It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag.
For additional information, refer to
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

To increase your confidence in the seat
belts, check the operation as follows:

WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely
secured in the latched position. If they
are not completely secured, passengers
may be injured in an accident or sudden
stop.

∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock
and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this
check, get the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service or to learn more about seat belt
operation.

WRS0139

Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button
1 . The seat belt automation the buckle 䊊
cally retracts.

Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock
seat belt movement by two separate
methods:
∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from
the retractor
∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,
made by the same company which
made the original equipment seat
belts, should be used with NISSAN
seat belts.

∙ The shoulder belt anchor height
should be adjusted to the position
best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an
accident.

∙ Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use
could result in serious personal injury
in the event of an accident.

LRS0242

Shoulder belt height adjustment
(front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best for you. For
additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. To
1
adjust, pull out the adjustment button 䊊
and move the shoulder belt anchor to the
2 , so the belt passes over
desired position 䊊
the center of the shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt
anchor into position.

WARNING

∙ After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the
shoulder belt anchor up and down to
make sure it is securely fixed in
position.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it
is not possible to properly fit the
lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender
that is compatible with the installed seat
belts is available for purchase. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)
of length and may be used for either the
driver or front passenger seating position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for assistance with purchasing an
extender if an extender is required.

∙ Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
∙ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply
a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or
carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow
the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not
allow the seat belts to retract until they
are completely dry.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

CHILD SAFETY
∙ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the
seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the
shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry
cloth.
∙ Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such
as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible
wires and anchors, work properly. If
loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other
damage on the webbing is found, the
entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat
belt becomes wrapped around a child’s
neck with the ALR mode activated, the
child can be seriously injured or killed if
the seat belt retracts and becomes
tight. This can occur even if the vehicle
is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be
unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt
with a suitable tool (such as a knife or
scissors) to release the seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect
them. They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in
this manual, child safety information is
available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic
safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to
learn the best way to transport your child.
There are three basic types of child restraint systems:

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Rear-facing child restraints
∙ Forward-facing child restraints
∙ Booster seats
The proper restraint depends on the child’s
size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year
and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed
in rear-facing child restraints. Forwardfacing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster
seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not
fit them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child
restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require the use of approved child
restraints for infants and small children. For
additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
You should choose a child restraint that fits
your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system or
with the vehicle seat belt. For additional
information, refer to “Child restraints” in this
section.

SMALL CHILDREN

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat.
This is especially important because
your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the
front passenger. For additional information, refer to “Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS)” in this section.

INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be
placed in a rear-facing child restraint.
NISSAN recommends that infants be
placed in child restraints that comply with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh
at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a
rear-facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the
child restraint. Children who outgrow the
height or weight limit of the rear-facing
child restraint and are at least 1 year old
should be secured in a forward-facing child
restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and
maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small
children be placed in child restraints that
comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. You should choose a
child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness until they
reach the maximum height or weight limit
allowed by the child restraint manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight
limit of the harness-equipped forwardfacing child restraint, NISSAN recommends
that the child be placed in a commercially
available booster seat to obtain proper
seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the
booster seat should raise the child so that
the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the chest and the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt
should not cross the neck or face and
should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt
should lie snugly across the lower hips or
upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster
seat can only be used in seating positions
that have a three-point type seat belt. The
booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and
have a label certifying that it complies with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

A booster seat should be used until the
child can pass the seat belt fit test below:

NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow
different guidelines. Check local and
state regulations to confirm your child is
using the correct restraint system before
traveling.

∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the
vehicle seatback?
∙ Is the child able to sit without slouching?

WARNING

∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over
the front edge of the seat with feet flat
on the floor?

Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the
cargo area. The child could be seriously
injured or killed in a sudden stop or
collision.

∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt
(lap belt low and snug across the hips
and shoulder belt across mid-chest
and shoulder)?
∙ Is the child able to use the properly adjusted head restraint/headrest?
∙ Will the child be able to stay in position
for the entire ride?

LRS2690

If you answered no to any of these questions, the child should remain in a booster
seat using a three-point type seat belt.

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CHILD RESTRAINTS

– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children
are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seat than in the front
seat. If you must install a forwardfacing child restraint in the front
seat, refer to “Forward-facing child
restraint installation using the seat
belts” in this section.

ARS1098

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:

WRS0256

– The child restraint must be used
and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
– Infants and children should never
be held on anyone’s lap. Even the
strongest adult cannot resist the
forces of a collision.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rearfacing child restraint must only be
used in the rear seat.
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child restraints may
not fit properly in your vehicle.

– Do not put a seat belt around both
a child and another passenger.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

– Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items
or equipment to the vehicle. Doing
so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed
using
the
damaged
anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision.
– Never use the anchor points for
adult seat belts, or other items.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the
front passenger seat.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child
restraint.
– Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child
restraint while in the vehicle.

∙ When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating
surface and buckles before placing a
child in the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal
child restraint anchor system, referred to
as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) system. Some child restraints
include rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors. For additional information, refer to
“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system” in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible
child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be
used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various
sizes. When selecting any child restraint,
keep the following points in mind:

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.
∙ If the child restraint is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the child
restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is
compatible with your child. Choose a
child restraint that is designed for your
child’s height and weight. Always follow
all recommended procedures.
∙ If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is less than 65 lbs.
(29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH
anchors or the seat belt to install the
child restraint (not both at the same
time).
∙ If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is greater than 65 lbs.
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not
the lower anchors) to install the child
restraint.

∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for installation.

install the child restraint. Be sure to follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved
child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forwardfacing child restraints be secured to the
designated anchor point on the vehicle.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to
install child restraints in the rear outboard
seating positions only. Do not attempt to
install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH anchors.

LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
LRS2165

LATCH system anchor locations

LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH system compatible child restraints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX
or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat
belt to secure the child restraint unless the
combined weight of the child and child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and child restraint
is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration.
– Do not secure a child restraint in
the center rear seating position using the LATCH lower anchors. The
child restraint will not be secured
properly.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

– Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower
anchor area. Feel to make sure
there are no obstructions over the
anchors such as seat belt webbing
or seat cushion material. The child
restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are
obstructed.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.

WRS0796

LATCH lower anchor location

LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH anchors are located as shown.
A label is attached to the seatback to help
you locate the LATCH lower anchors.

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0661

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH
lower anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include
two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions
in your vehicle. With this system, you do not
have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the
child restraint. Check your child restraint for
a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the
instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer.

WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
LRS0662

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully
read and follow the instructions in this
manual and those supplied with the child
restraint.

WRS0797

Top tether anchor point locations
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
the LATCH lower anchor attachments or
seat belts. For additional information, refer
to “Installing top tether strap” in this section.

If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
1 are located on the rear
Anchor points 䊊
parcel shelf.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child re-

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WRS0801

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0802

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to the
lower anchors.

the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not
all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 1 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
WARNING
LRS0673

Rear-facing – step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.

LRS0674

Rear-facing – step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint or try installing by using

The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result in
the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in
the rear seats:

WRS0256

Rear-facing – step 1
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the
front seat. Position the child restraint
on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0761

Rear-facing – step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.

LRS2395

Rear-facing – step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR
mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

LRS2396

Rear-facing – step 4
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack
in the belt.

WRS0762

Rear-facing – step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child
restraint to compress the vehicle seat
cushion and seatback while pulling up
on the seat belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 3 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH

LRS2397

Rear-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If
the restraint is not secure, tighten the
seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.

For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

restraint/headrest adjustment (if so
equipped),
refer
to
"Head
restraints/headrests" in this section.
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.

WRS0799

Forward-facing

webbing-mounted –
step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to the
lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point. For additional
information, refer to “Installing top
tether strap” in this section.
Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in

WRS0800

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.
3. The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest (if so equipped) to
obtain the correct child restraint fit. If
the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be
sure
to
reinstall
the
head
restraint/headrest (if so equipped)
when the child restraint is removed.
For additional information about head

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

7. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 1 through 6.

LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 4
4. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

WRS0697

Forward-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint. Not all child restraints fit
in all types of vehicles.

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest (if
so equipped) and store it in a secure
place. Be sure to reinstall the head
restraint/headrest (if so equipped)
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional information about head
restraint/headrest (if so equipped) adjustment, removal and installation, refer
to "Head restraints/headrests" in this
section.
LRS2627
1
䊊
2
䊊

Rear bench seat
Top tether strap
Anchor point

Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
the LATCH lower anchor attachments.
First, secure the child restraint with the
LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard positions only).

1 over
2. Position the top tether strap 䊊
the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
2 as shown.
anchor point 䊊
4. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS

Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the vehicle seat
belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat:

WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result in
the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section.

1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position.
Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and,
therefore, must not be used in the
front seat.
WRS0699

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest (if so equipped) is
removed, store it in a secure place. Be
sure
to
reinstall
the
head
restraint/headrest (if so equipped)
when the child restraint is removed.
For additional information about head
restraint/headrest (if so equipped) adjustment, removal and installation, re-

fer to “Head restraints/headrests” in
this section.

Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in
seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.

If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
(if so equipped) and it is interfering with
the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different
child restraint.

WRS0680

Forward-facing – step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap”
in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

LRS0667

Forward-facing – step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to ELR mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack
in the belt.

WRS0681

Forward-facing – step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child
restraint with your knee to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
while pulling up on the seat belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

9. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 4 through 8.

WRS0698

Forward-facing – step 8
8. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If
the restraint is not secure, tighten the
seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.

WRS0475

Forward-facing – step 10
10. If the child restraint is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front
passenger air bag status light
should illuminate. If this light is not illuminated, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.
Move the child restraint to another
seating position. Have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

Rear bench seat
Top tether strap
Anchor point

Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat
belt.

1 over
2. Position the top tether strap 䊊
the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
2 as shown.
anchor point 䊊
4. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.
CENTER SEATING POSITION
1 over the
1. Position the top tether strap 䊊
seatback.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether
2 as shown.
anchor point 䊊

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a
booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not
used properly, the risk of a child being
injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s
face and neck and the lap portion
of the belt does not cross the
stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the
child’s arm.
– A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that
has a lap/shoulder belt.

LRS2479

Low back booster seat

High back booster seat

LRS0453

Booster seats of various sizes are offered
by several manufacturers. When selecting
any booster seat, keep the following points
in mind:
∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

∙ If the booster seat is compatible with
your vehicle, place the child in the
booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is
compatible with the child. Always follow
all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved
child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.

LRS0464

∙ Make sure the child’s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or
vehicle seat. The seatback must be at
or above the center of the child’s ears.
For example, if a low back booster seat
is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be
at or above the center of the child’s ears.
If the seatback is lower than the center
of the child’s ears, a high back booster
seat should be used.

The instructions in this section apply to
booster seat installation in the rear seats
or the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation
WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety”,
“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sections of this manual before installing a child
restraint.

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Follow these steps to install a booster seat
in the rear seat or in the front passenger
seat:

restraints/headrests" in this section.
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
booster seat fit, try another seating
position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt
low and snug on the child’s hips. Be
sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.

WRS0699

LRS0454

1. If you must install a booster seat in
the front seat, move the seat to the
rearmost position.

Front passenger position
3. The booster seat should be positioned
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
Only place it in a front-facing direction.
Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest (if so equipped) to
obtain the correct booster seat fit. If
the head restraint/headrest (if so
equipped) is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint/headrest (if so
equipped) when the booster seat is
removed. For additional information
about head restraint/headrest (if so
equipped) adjustment, removal and installation,
refer
to
"Head

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the
seat belt toward the retractor to take
up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder
belt is positioned across the top,
middle portion of the child’s shoulder.
Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat
belt shown in “Three-point type seat
belt with retractor” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS)
PRECAUTIONS ON SRS
This SRS section contains important information concerning the following systems:
∙ Driver and front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)
∙ Front
seat-mounted
supplemental air bag

side-impact

∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag
WRS0475

7. If the booster seat is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front pasmay or
senger air bag status light
may not illuminate, depending on the
size of the child and the type of booster
seat being used. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.

∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
Supplemental front-impact air bag system
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can
help cushion the impact force to the head
and chest of the driver and front passenger
in certain frontal collisions.
Front
seat-mounted
side-impact
supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the chest area of the driver and
front passenger in certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the head of occupants in front and
rear outboard seating positions in certain
side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags
are designed to inflate on the side where
the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the
curtain air bags are designed to inflate and
remain inflated for a short time.
The SRS is designed to supplement the
crash protection provided by the driver and
front passenger seat belts and is not a
substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant
seated a suitable distance away from the
steering wheel, instrument panel and door
finishers. For additional information, refer
to “Seat belts” in this section.
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.

and as far away as practical from the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
Always properly use the seat belts.
∙ The driver and front passenger seat
belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are
fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System monitors the severity of a
collision and seat belt usage, then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure
to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
WRS0031

WARNING
∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact,
rear impact, rollover, or lower severity
frontal collision. Always wear your
seat belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents
∙ The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit. For additional information,
refer to “Front passenger air bag and
status light” in this section.

∙ The seat belts and the front air bags
are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat.
The front air bags inflate with great
force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced
Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you
are at greater risk of injury or death in
a crash. You may also receive serious
or fatal injuries from the front air bag
if you are up against it when it inflates.
Always sit back against the seatback

∙ The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the
front passenger air bag OFF under
some conditions. This sensor is only
used in this seat. Failure to be properly
seated and wearing the seat belt can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section.
∙ Keep hands on the outside of the
steering wheel. Placing them inside
the steering wheel rim could increase
the risk that they are injured when the
front air bag inflates.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

ARS1133

ARS1041

WARNING
∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them
in your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ARS1042

ARS1043

ARS1044

WARNING
∙ Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

ARS1045

ARS1046

WRS0431

∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat.
An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.

Front
seat-mounted
side-impact
supplemental air bags and roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags:

WARNING

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event
of a frontal impact, rear impact, or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce
the risk or severity of injury in various
kinds of accidents.

WARNING
∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective
when you are sitting well back and
upright in the seat with both feet on
the floor. The side air bag and curtain
air bag inflate with great force. Do not
allow anyone to place their hand, leg
or face near the side air bag on the
side of the seatback of the front seat
or near the side roof rails. Do not allow
anyone sitting in the front seats or
rear outboard seats to extend their
hand out of the window or lean
against the door. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the previous illustrations.

WRS0032

SSS0162

WARNING
∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you
may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who
should always be properly restrained.
Some examples of dangerous riding
positions
are
shown
in
the
illustrations.
∙ Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
side air bag inflation.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

SSS0159

LII2184

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
1. Top tether strap anchor
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag inflators
3. Rear seat belts
4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag
5. Front
seat-mounted
supplemental air bag

side-impact

6. Head restraints/headrests
7. Front seat belts
8. Side-impact pressure sensor (driver’s
side shown; front passenger’s side
similar)
9. Supplemental front-impact air bags
10. Seats
11. Occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor)
12. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
13. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, please observe the following
items.
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
pocket.
∙ Make sure that there is nothing pressing against the rear of the seatback,
such as a child restraint installed in
the rear seat or an object stored on
the floor.
∙ Make sure that there is no object
placed under the front passenger
seat.
∙ Make sure that there is no object
placed between the seat cushion and
center console or between the seat
cushion and the door.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

about the system. If you are considering
modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of
this Owner’s Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud
noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a
breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the face and chest of the front occupants.
They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air
bag may cause facial abrasions or other
injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and front passenger seated upright
as far as practical away from the steering
wheel or instrument panel. The front air
bags inflate quickly in order to help protect
the front occupants. Because of this, the
force of the front air bag inflating can in-

crease the risk of injury if the occupant is
too close to, or is against, the front air bag
module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a
collision.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.

WRS0475

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed
to automatically turn OFF under some
conditions. Read this section carefully
to learn how it operates. Proper use of
the seat, seat belt and child restraints is
necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in
this manual concerning the use of
seats, seat belts and child restraints can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

After the ignition switch is placed in the
"ON" position, the front passenger air bag
status light on the instrument panel illumi-

nates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off or remains illuminated depending on

CONDITION

DESCRIPTION

Empty

Empty front passenger seat
Bag or Child or Child Restraint or
Small Adult in front passenger seat
Adult in the front passenger seat

Nobody/Somebody
Adult

In addition to the above, certain objects
placed on the front passenger seat may
also cause the light to operate as described above depending on their weight.
For additional information, refer to “Normal
operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this
section.
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,
it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag
and other air bags in your vehicle are not
part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help
reduce the risk of injury or death from an

PASSENGER AIR BAG INDI)
CATOR LIGHT (
ON (illuminated)

the front passenger seat occupied status.
The light operates as follows:

FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS
INHIBITED

ON (illuminated)

INHIBITED

OFF (dark)

ACTIVATED

inflating air bag to certain front passenger
seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned
OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the
requirements.
The occupant classification sensor in this
vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to
detect an occupant and objects on the
seat by weight. For example, if a child is in
the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn
the front passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child
restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, its weight and the
child’s weight can be detected and cause
the air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who
are properly seated and using the seat belt
as outlined in this manual should not

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

cause the front passenger air bag to be
automatically turned OFF. For small adults
it may be turned OFF, however if the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat
cushion (for example, by not sitting upright,
by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by
otherwise being out of position), this could
cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.
Always be sure to be seated and wearing
the seat belt properly for the most effective
protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and
children be properly restrained in a rear
seat. NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster
seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If
this is not possible, the occupant classification sensor is designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger

air bag OFF for specified child restraints as
required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the
ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or
move in a collision or sudden stop. This can
also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. For
additional information about proper use
and installation, refer to “Child restraints” in
this section.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied,
the front passenger air bag is designed not
to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects
placed on the seat could result in air bag
inflation, because of the object’s weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air
bag inflation, such as if a child is standing
on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this
manual. Always be sure that you and all
vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status
light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
front passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),

it could be that the person is a small adult,
or is not sitting on the seat properly or not
using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front
seat, the front passenger air bag status
light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the
type of child restraint being used. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash),
it could be that the child restraint or seat
belt is not being used properly. Make sure
that the child restraint is installed properly,
the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air bag
status light is still not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear
seat.
If the front passenger air bag status light
will not illuminate even though you believe
that the child restraint, the seat belts and
the occupant are properly positioned, it is
recommended that you take your vehicle
to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can
check system status by using a special
tool. However, until you have confirmed
with a dealer that your air bag is working
properly, reposition the occupant or child
restraint in a rear seat.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and
front passenger air bag status light will
take a few seconds to register a change in
the front passenger seat status. This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air
, located in the mebag warning light
ter and gauges area of the instrument
panel, will be illuminated (blinking or
steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Normal operation
In order for the occupant classification
sensor system to classify the front passenger based on weight, please follow the precautions and steps outlined below:
Precautions
∙ Make sure that there are no objects
weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on
the seat or placed in the seatback
pocket.
∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other
object is not pressing against the rear
of the seatback.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not
pushing or pulling on the back of the
front passenger seat.
∙ Make sure that the front passenger
seat or seatback is not forced back
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ Make sure that there is no object placed
under the front passenger seat.
Steps
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”
section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered
on the seat cushion with your feet comfortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your
lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the
“Seat belts” section of this manual.
Front passenger seat belt buckle status is monitored by the occupant classification system, and is used as an input to determine occupancy status. So,
it is highly recommended that the front
passenger fasten their seat belt.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds
allowing the system to classify the
front passenger before the vehicle is
put into motion.
5. Ensure proper classification by checking the front passenger air bag status
light.
NOTE:
This vehicle’s occupant classification
sensor system generally keeps the classification locked during driving, so it is
important that you confirm that the
front passenger is properly classified
prior to driving. However, the occupant
classification sensor may recalculate the
weight of the occupant under some conditions (both while driving and when
stopped), so front passenger seat occupants should continue to remain seated
as outlined above.
Troubleshooting
If you think the front passenger air bag
status light is incorrect:
1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying
the front passenger seat:

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag
light is functioning as intended. The
front passenger air bag is suppressed.
However, if the occupant is not a small
adult, then this may be due to the following
conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered on
the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat.
∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console or between
the seat cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the person
should be advised not to ride in the front
passenger seat and the vehicle should be
checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
2. If the light is OFF with a small adult,
child or child restraint occupying the
front passenger seat.
This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright,
leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her
feet comfortably extended to the floor.
∙ The child restraint is not properly installed, as outlined in the “Child restraints” section of this manual.
∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)
hanging on the seat or placed in the
seatback pocket.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

are similar to those of a higher severity
impact. They are designed to inflate on the
side where the vehicle is impacted. They
may not inflate in certain side collisions.

air bag and curtain air bag may cause
abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags
and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate
in certain types of rollover collisions or near
rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for example, during severe offroading) may cause the curtain air bags to
inflate.

The seat belts should be correctly worn
and the driver and front passenger seated
upright as far as practical away from the
side air bag. Rear seat passengers should
be seated as far away as practical from the
door finishers and side roof rails. The side
air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly
in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag
and curtain air bag inflating can increase
the risk of injury if the occupant is too close
to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag will deflate
quickly after the collision is over.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always
an indication of proper side air bag and
curtain air bag operation.
LRS0259

Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and
roof-mounted curtain sideimpact and rollover supplemental
air bag systems
The side air bags are located in the outside
of the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof
rails. All of the information, cautions and
warnings in this manual must be followed. The side air bags and curtain air
bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision

When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,
followed by the release of smoke. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to
inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the chest and pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the
impact force to the head of occupants in
the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce
serious injuries. However, an inflating side

The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a
short time.
The side air bags and curtain air bags
operate only when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects near the
seatback of the front seats. Also, do
not place any objects (an umbrella,
bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects
may become dangerous projectiles
and cause injury if a side air bag
inflates.
∙ Right after inflation, several side air
bag and curtain air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch
them; you may severely burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent damage to
or accidental inflation of the side air
bag and curtain air bag or damage to
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems.
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
side air bag and curtain air bag
systems.

∙ Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the
front seats by placing material near
the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag.
∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the side air bag and curtain air bag. It
is also recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical
test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the side air bag
or curtain air bag system.
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the side air bag
and curtain air bag systems and guide the
buyer to the appropriate sections in this
Owner’s Manual.

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seat belt with pretensioner(s)
(front seats)
WARNING
∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused
after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor
and buckle as a unit.
∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a
collision but pretensioner(s) are not
activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to
prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with the pretensioner system may
result in serious personal injury.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the pretensioner system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for installation of electrical
equipment. Unauthorized electrical
test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the pretensioner system.
∙ If you need to dispose of the pretensioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.
The pretensioner system may activate
with the supplemental air bag system in
certain types of collisions. Working with the
seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help
tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased within the
seat belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed to the floor of the vehicle.
These seat belts are used the same way as
conventional seat belts.

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to
inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load
limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against
the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning
is used to indicate malfunctions
light
in the pretensioner system. For additional
information, refer to "Supplemental air bag
warning light" in this section. If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning
light indicates there is a malfunction, have
the system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.

LRS2163

SRS air bag warning labels (located
on the sun visors)

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental
front-impact air bag system are placed in
the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may
cause serious injury or death.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag and curtain air
bag and pretensioner systems need servicing:
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
LRS0100

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
in the instrument panel,
displaying
monitors the circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.
When the ignition is placed in the ON or
START position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the
system is operational.

Under these conditions, the front air bag,
side air bag and curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly.
They must be checked and repaired. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
and/or pretensioner systems will not
operate in an accident. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Repair and replacement
procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to
inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. These
systems should be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
When maintenance work is required on the
vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,
curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be pointed out to the
person performing the maintenance. The
ignition switch should always be placed in
the LOCK position when working under the
hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING
∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air
bag module will not function again
and must be replaced. Additionally,
the activated pretensioner(s) must
also be replaced. The air bag module
and pretensioner(s) should be replaced. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
However, the air bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired.

∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle
from any direction, your Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) should be
checked to verify it is still functioning
correctly. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The OCS should be checked even if no
air bags deploy as a result of the impact. Failure to verify proper OCS
function may result in an improper air
bag deployment resulting in injury or
death.

∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag systems and the pretensioner
system should be inspected if there is
any damage to the front end or side
portion of the vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
∙ If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Compass (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Vehicle information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
How to use the vehicle information
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Resetting the trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Vehicle information display warnings
and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system
(Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
system (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Instrument brightness control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . 2-42
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch. . . . . . 2-42
E-call (SOS) switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Front-door pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46

Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Overhead sunglasses storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Power moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Console light (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
customers and gate openers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Operating the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . 2-59
Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
If your vehicle is stolen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.

2.
3.

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

LIC3763

2-2 Instruments and controls

12.
13.
14.

METERS AND GAUGES
15.
16.

17.
18.

19.
20.

21.
22.

*: For additional information, refer to the
separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LIC3459

1.
2.
3.
4.

Tachometer
Warning and indicator lights
Vehicle information display
Odometer
Twin trip odometer
Speedometer

5.
6.

Fuel gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge

Instruments and controls 2-3

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and odometer. The speedometer is
located on the right side of the meter cluster. The odometer is located within the vehicle information display.

LIC2218

LIC2921

Speedometer

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

The odometer and the twin trip odometer
1 are displayed in the vehicle information
䊊
display when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position.
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

2-4 Instruments and controls

Changing the display
2 on the left
Push the TRIP RESET switch 䊊
side of the instrument panel to change the
display as follows:

→ Trip
Trip
age → Trip

→ Odometer Mile-

Resetting the trip odometer
2 for more
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 䊊
than 1 second resets the currently displayed trip odometer to zero.

LIC2219

TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev
1 .
engine into the red zone 䊊

CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, reduce engine speed. Operating
the engine in the red zone may cause
serious engine damage.

LIC2220

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant
temperature. The engine coolant tempera1 when
ture is within the normal range 䊊
the gauge needle points within the zone
shown in the illustration.
The engine coolant temperature varies
with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

Instruments and controls 2-5

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers 0 (Empty).
indicates that the fuel-filler
The
door is located on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the
normal range, stop the vehicle as soon
as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine.
For additional information, refer to “If
your vehicle overheats” in the “In case
of emergency” section of this manual
for immediate action required.

CAUTION

LIC2222

FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel
level in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or
down hills.
The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
The low fuel warning message shows in
the vehicle information display when the
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

2-6 Instruments and controls

∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
come on. Refuel as soon as possible.
light
After a few driving trips, the
should turn off. If the light remains on
after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
this section.

COMPASS (if so equipped)
This unit measures terrestrial magnetism
and indicates the direction of the vehicle’s
heading.

The compass will be calibrated once it has
tracked three complete circles.

COMPASS DISPLAY

With the ignition switch placed in the ON
button as deposition, press the
scribed in the chart below to activate various features of the automatic anti-glare
rearview mirror.
Press and hold
the
button for
about:
1 second
5 seconds
9 seconds

Press the
button when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The
direction will be displayed.

Zone variation change procedure

Feature:
(Press button again for about
1 second to change settings)
Compass display toggles on/off
Compass zone can be changed
to correct false compass readings
Compass enters calibration
mode

For information about the automatic antiglare feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare
rearview mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.

LIC1487

button for about 1 second
Press the
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
1
position to toggle the compass display 䊊
on or off. The display will indicate the direction of the vehicle’s heading.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route.

The difference between magnetic north
and geographical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can
sometimes be great enough to cause false
compass readings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular
location if this happens:
1. Establish your location on the zone
map. Refer to the illustration. Record
your zone number.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
button in for 5 seconds
3. Press the
until the current zone entry number is
displayed.
button repeatedly until
4. Press the
the desired zone entry number is displayed.

Instruments and controls 2-7

Once the desired zone number is displayed, stop pressing the
button and
the display will show compass direction
within a few seconds.
NOTE:
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

WIC0355

2-8 Instruments and controls

∙ If a magnet is located near the compass or the vehicle is driven where the
terrestrial magnetism is disturbed,
the compass display may not indicate the correct direction.
∙ In places where the terrestrial magnetism is disturbed, the correction of
the direction starts automatically.
Inaccurate compass direction
The compass display is equipped with automatic correction function. If the correct
direction is not shown, follow this procedure.
1. With the display turned on, press and
button for about 9 sechold the
onds. The display will read “C.”
2. Calibrate the compass by driving the
vehicle in three complete circles at a
maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).

∙ The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while
driving up or down a steep hill. (The
compass returns to the correct compass point when the vehicle moves to
an area where the geomagnetism is
stabilized.)

CAUTION
∙ Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the
operation of the compass.
∙ When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it
may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.

3. After completing the circles the display
should return to normal.
∙ If the compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjustment, have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-9

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS
AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Seat belt warning light and chime

Security indicator light

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system warning light

Supplemental air bag warning light

Side light and headlight indicator light
(green)

Front fog light indicator light (if so
equipped)

Slip indicator light

Charge warning light

Front passenger air bag status light

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low tire pressure warning light

High beam indicator light (blue)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

Master warning light

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Power steering warning light

Overdrive OFF indicator light (if so
equipped)

Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light

Brake warning light

CHECKING LIGHTS
With all doors closed, apply the parking
brake, fasten the seat belts and place the
ignition switch in the ON position without
starting the engine. The following lights (if
so equipped) will come on:
,

2-10 Instruments and controls

The following lights (if so equipped) will
come on briefly and then go off:
,

a burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

,
If any light does not come on or operate in
a way other than described, it may indicate

Some indicators and warnings are also displayed on the vehicle information display
between the speedometer and tachom-

eter. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section.

WARNING LIGHTS
For additional information on warnings
and indicators, refer to “Vehicle information
display” in this section.

Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the ABS warning light illuminates
and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is
operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while
the engine is running or while driving, it
may indicate the ABS is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
function is turned off. The brake system
then operates normally but without antilock assistance. For additional information,
refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.

Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB) system
warning light
This light comes on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. It illuminates briefly and then turns off.
This light illuminates when the AEB system
is set to OFF on the meter display.
If the light illuminates when the AEB system is on, it may indicate that the system is
unavailable. For additional information, refer to “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

Brake warning
light

This light functions for both the parking
brake and the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied.
Low brake fluid warning light

level. If the light comes on while the engine
is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake
fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Doit-yourself ” section of this manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have
the warning system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

WARNING
∙ Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on.
Driving could be dangerous. If you
judge it to be safe, drive carefully to
the nearest service station for repairs.
Otherwise, have your vehicle towed
because
driving
it
could
be
dangerous.
∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid

Instruments and controls 2-11

∙ If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the
brake warning light and the ABS warning
light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is
not functioning properly. Have the brake
system checked and, if necessary, repaired.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Avoid high-speed
driving and abrupt braking. For additional
information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light” in this section.

Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is
running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the
engine off and check the generator belt. If
the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the
light remains on, have the system checked.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

2-12 Instruments and controls

CAUTION
∙ Do not ground electrical accessories
directly to the battery terminal. Doing
so will bypass the variable voltage
control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. For
additional information, refer to “Variable voltage control system” in the
“Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.
∙ Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing.

Low tire pressure warning
light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the
spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns
of low tire pressure or indicates that the
TPMS is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about
1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”
warning also appears in the vehicle information display.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust
the tire pressure of all four tires to the
recommended COLD tire pressure shown
on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s door opening.
The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure,
the vehicle must be driven at speeds
above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the
TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure
warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge
to check the tire pressure.
The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning
appears each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the low
tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section, “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” and “In case of emergency” sections of this manual.
TPMS malfunction
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the
low tire pressure warning light will flash for
approximately 1 minute when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The
light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the
system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The "Tire Pressure Low — Add Air" warning
does not appear if the low tire pressure
warning light illuminates to indicate a
TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section and “Tire
pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of
this manual.

WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
∙ If the light does not illuminate with the
ignition switch placed in the ON position, have the vehicle checked as soon
as possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury or
death. Check the tire pressure for all
four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
show on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s
door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If the light still
illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat
or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If
you have a flat tire, replace it with a
spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire
is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-13

∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your
tires replaced and/or TPMS system
reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for these services.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION
∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the
TPMS may not operate correctly.
∙ Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the four wheels correctly.

2-14 Instruments and controls

Master warning light
When the ignition is in the ON position, the
master warning light illuminates if any of
the following are displayed on the vehicle
information display.
∙ No key warning
∙ Low fuel warning
∙ Low windshield-washer fluid warning
∙ Parking brake release warning
∙ Door/trunk open warning
∙ Loose fuel cap
∙ Check tire pressure warning

Power steering warning
light
WARNING
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work.
Steering will be harder to operate.

∙ When the power steering warning
light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for
the steering. You will still have control
of the vehicle, but the steering will be
much harder to operate. Have the
power steering system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the power steering warning light illuminates. After starting the engine, the
power steering warning light turns off. This
indicates that the electric power steering
system is operational. If the power steering
warning light illuminates while the engine
is running, it may indicate the power steering system is not functioning properly and
may need servicing. Have the hydraulic
pump electric power steering system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to “Power steering”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

Seat belt warning light and
chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten
your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON
or START position and remains illuminated
until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the
same time, the chime sounds for about
6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is
securely fastened.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened when the front passenger’s seat
is occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, the system does not activate the warning light for
the front passenger.
For additional information, refer to “Seat
belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual.

Supplemental air bag
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
or START position, the supplemental air
bag warning light illuminates for about
7 seconds and then turns off. This means
the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,
and pretensioner systems need servicing
and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN
dealer:
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system)
and/or the pretensioners may not function
properly. For additional details, refer to
“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in
the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag systems and/or pretensioner systems will
not operate in an accident. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

INDICATOR LIGHTS
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section.

Front fog light indicator
light (if so equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when the front fog lights are on. For
additional information, refer to “Fog light
switch” in this section.

Front passenger air bag
status light
The front passenger air bag status
will be lit and the passenger front
light
air bag will be off depending on how the
front passenger seat is being used.

Instruments and controls 2-15

For additional information, refer to “Front
passenger air bag and status light” in the
“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when
the low beams are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes
on when the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or
blinks while the engine is running, it may
indicate a potential emission control malfunction.
The MIL may also come on steady if the
fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the
vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure
the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least
3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
light
After a few driving trips, the
should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists.

2-16 Instruments and controls

If this indicator light comes on steady for
20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds
when the engine is not running, it indicates
that the vehicle is not ready for an emission
control system inspection/maintenance
test. For additional information, refer to
“Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
Operation
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
∙ MIL on steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the
Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the
vehicle information display. If the fuelfiller cap is loose or missing, tighten or
install the cap and continue to drive the
light should turn off
vehicle. The
light
after a few driving trips. If the
does not turn off after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. You do not need
to have your vehicle towed to the
dealer.

∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has
been detected which may damage the
emission control system. To reduce or
avoid emission control system damage:
– do not drive at speeds above
45 mph (72 km/h).
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
– if possible, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled or towed.
The MIL may stop blinking and come on
steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without
having the emission control system
checked and repaired as necessary
could lead to poor driveability, reduced
fuel economy, and possible damage to
the emission control system.

Overdrive OFF indicator
light (if so equipped)
QR25DE:
This light illuminates and then turns off
when the ignition switch in placed to the
ON position, and when the overdrive OFF
mode is selected.

Side light and headlight
indicator light (green)
The side light and headlight indicator light
illuminates when the side light or headlight
position is selected. For additional information, refer to “Headlight and turn signal
switch” in this section.

Slip indicator light

VQ35DE:
This light illuminates and then turns off
when the ignition switch is placed to the
ON position.
QR25DE and VQ35DE:
For additional information, refer to “Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

Security indicator light
This light blinks when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position.
The blinking security indicator light indicates that the security systems equipped
on the vehicle are operational.
For additional information, refer to “Security
systems” in this section.

This indicator will blink when the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system is operating, thus alerting that the vehicle is nearing
its traction limits. The road surface may be
slippery.

Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn
signal switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is
turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the
VDC OFF switch is pushed to off. This indicates the VDC system has been turned off.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine and the system will operate
normally. For additional information, refer
to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
The VDC indicator light also comes on
when you place the ignition switch in the
ON position. The light will turn off after
about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light stays on or comes on
indicator light while
along with the
you are driving, have the VDC system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
While the VDC system is operating, you
might feel a slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or
accelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear
warnings. When a disc brake pad requires
replacement, it makes a high pitched
scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon
as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Instruments and controls 2-17

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
Light reminder chime

∙ Tire pressure information

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF
position, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened if the headlights or parking
lights are on.

∙ Audio information
∙ Navigation information (if so equipped)

Turn the headlight control switch off before
leaving the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key® door
buzzer
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if
the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle
when locking the doors. When the buzzer
sounds, be sure to check both the vehicle
and the Intelligent Key. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in
the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments”
section of this manual.

LIC2205

The vehicle information display is located
to the left of the speedometer. It displays
such items as:
∙ Vehicle settings
∙ Trip computer information
∙ Drive system warnings and settings (if
so equipped)
∙ Cruise control system information (if so
equipped)
∙ NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation information
∙ Indicators and warning

2-18 Instruments and controls

3
䊊

— select/enter the vehicle information display menu items or to
change from one display screen to the
next (i.e. trip, Fuel economy)
buttons also control
The ENTER and
audio and control panel functions. For additional information, refer to “Steering
wheel switch for audio control” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual.

STARTUP DISPLAY
LIC2322

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
The vehicle information display can be
changed using the
,
, ENTER
switches located on the steering
and
wheel.
1
䊊

2
䊊

— navigate through the items in
the vehicle information display
ENTER — change or select an item in
the vehicle information display
— go back to the previous menu

When the vehicle in placed in the ON or ACC
position the screens that display in the vehicle information include:
∙ Active system status
∙ Tire pressures
∙ Trip computer
∙ Audio
∙ Navigation (if so equipped)
∙ Driver Assistance (if so equipped)
∙ Fuel economy
∙ Warnings
Warnings will only display if there are any
present. For additional information, refer to
“Vehicle information display warnings and
indicators” in this section.

To control what items display in the vehicle
information display, refer to “How to use the
vehicle information display” in this section.

RESETTING THE TRIP COMPUTER
1. Press the
button until you reach
the trip computer mode.
button again for more
2. Press the
than 1.5 seconds to reset average fuel
consumption, average speed, distance
to empty, and journey time.

SETTINGS
The setting mode allows you to change the
information displayed in the vehicle information display:
∙ Driver Assistance (if so equipped)
∙ Vehicle Settings
∙ Main Menu Selection
∙ Body Color
∙ Maintenance
∙ Alarms
∙ Language
∙ Unit
∙ Welcome Effects
∙ Factory Reset

Instruments and controls 2-19

Driver Assistance
The driver assistance menu allows the user
to change the settings for driving, parking,
and braking aids.
Menu item
Driving Aids (if so equipped)
Blind Spot

Parking Aids (if so equipped)
Sensor
Display
Volume
Range
Emergency Braking
System

2-20 Instruments and controls

Result
Displays available driving aids.
Allows user to turn Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems on or off. For additional
information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Displays available parking aids.
Allows user to turn the parking sensors on, off, or have only the front sensors on. For additional information, refer
to “Front and rear sonar system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Allows user to turn the parking aids display on or off.
Allows user to set the parking sensor chime volume to Low/Med./High.
Allows the user to set the parking sensor range to Near/Mid/Far.
Displays available emergency braking options.
Allows user to turn the emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” and “Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allow the user to
change the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and other vehicle settings.
Menu item
Auto Room Lamp
Light Sensitivity
Light Off Delay
Welcome Light (if so equipped)
Wiper with Speed
I-Key Door Lock
Selective Unlock

Auto Door Unlock
Off
IGN Off
Shift into P
Answer Back Horn
Remote Start (if so equipped)

Battery Saver

Result
Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off.
Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle.
Allows user to change the duration of time that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off.
Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off.
Allows user to turn wiper with speed on or off.
Allows user to turn I-Key door lock on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated.
Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked after the
door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is
pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the
door unlock operation is performed again within 1 minute. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be
unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.
Displays available options for the auto door unlock.
Doors will have to be manually unlocked.
Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off.
Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators
will flash once when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key.
Allows user to turn the Remote Engine Start on or off. When turned on, the engine can be restarted remotely.
For additional information, refer to “Remote Engine Start” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section
of this manual.
Allows user to turn the battery saver on or off. When turned on, the battery saver automatically turns off the
ignition after a period of time when the ignition switch is left in the ACC or ON position.

Instruments and controls 2-21

Main Menu Selection
The main menu selection menu allows the
user to customize the information that appears in the vehicle information display.
Menu item
Tire Pressures
Trip Computer
Audio
Navigation (if so equipped)
Driver Assistance (if so equipped)
Fuel Economy

Result
Allows user to turn the tire pressures display on or off.
Allows user to turn the trip computer display on or off.
Allows user to turn the audio display on or off.
Allows user to turn the navigation display on or off.
Allows user turn the driver assistance display on or off.
Allows user to turn the fuel economy display on or off.

Body Color
The body color menu allows the user to
customize the information that appears in
the vehicle information display.
Menu item
Body Color

2-22 Instruments and controls

Result
Allows user to select the color of the vehicle that appears in the vehicle information display.

Maintenance

WARNING

The maintenance menu allows the user to
set reminders for various vehicle maintenance items.

Menu item
Service

Tire
Other

The tire replacement indicator is not a
substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional information, refer to “Changing
wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ”
section of this manual. Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving
habits and road conditions affect tire
wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance

does not mean your tires will last that
long. Use the tire replacement indicator
as a guide only and always perform
regular tire checks. Failure to perform
regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to a collision, which could
result in serious personal injury or
death.

Result
This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing maintenance items
other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire
rotation. You can set or reset the distance for checking or replacing the items. You can set or reset the distance
for service type items.
For scheduled maintenance items and intervals, refer to the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual.
This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for replacing tires. You can set or reset the distance for replacing tires.
This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing maintenance items
other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire
rotation. The distance for checking or replacing the items can be set or reset.

Instruments and controls 2-23

Alarms
The alarms menu allows the user to set
various alerts.
Menu item
Outside Temp.
Timer Alert
Navigation (if so equipped)

Result
Allows user to turn the outside temp. alarm on or off.
Allows user to set the timer alert for a specific interval.
Allows user to turn the navigation alarm on or off.

Language
The language menu allows the user to
change the languages displayed in the vehicle information display.
Menu item
Language

Result
Allows user to select a language in which the vehicle information display will be shown.

Unit
The Unit menu allows the user to change
the units shown in the vehicle information
display.
Menu item
Mileage
Tire Pressures
Temperature

2-24 Instruments and controls

Result
Allows user to select different mileage display units.
Allows user to select different pressure display units.
Allows user to select different temperature display units.

Welcome Effect
The welcome effect menu allows the user
to control the welcome effect feature.
Menu item
Welcome Effect

Result
Allows user to turn the welcome effect feature on or off.

Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to
restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status.
Menu item
Factory Reset

Result
Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected,
the user can confirm or deny the reset.

Instruments and controls 2-25

LIC3757

2-26 Instruments and controls

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

18. Trunk Open

34. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual

19. Timer Alert – Have a break?

No Key Detected

1. No Key Detected

20. Low Outside Temperature

2. Key ID Incorrect

21. Power will turn off to save the battery

This warning appears when the Intelligent
Key is left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position. Make sure
the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

3. Key Battery Low
4. I-Key System
Manual

22. Power turned off to save the battery
Error:

See

Owner’s

5. Key Registration Complete
6. Shift to Park
7. Push ignition to OFF
8. Push brake and start switch to drive
9. Engine start operation for Intelligent
Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)

23. Reminder: Turn OFF headlights
24. Headlight System Error: See Owner’s
Manual (if so equipped)
25. Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s
Manual (if so equipped)
26. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so
equipped)

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.
Key ID Incorrect
This warning appears when the ignition
switch is placed from the OFF position and
the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the
system. You cannot start the engine with
an unregistered key.

10. Release Parking Brake

27. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)

11. Low Fuel

28. Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)

12. Loose Fuel Cap

29. Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if
so equipped)

Key Battery Low

30. Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power.

13. Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual
14. Low Washer Fluid
15. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

31. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicator
(if so equipped)

16. TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual

32. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

17. Door Open

33. Transmission Shift Position indicator

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.

If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in
the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-27

I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual

Push ignition to OFF

After the ignition switch is pushed to the
ON position, this light comes on for a period
of time and then turns off.

After the Push ignition to OFF warning illuminates, the warning will illuminate if the
ignition switch is placed in the ACC position
when the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)
position.

The I-Key System Error message warns of
a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. If the light comes on while the engine
is stopped, it may be impossible to start
the engine.
If the light comes on while the engine is
running, you can drive the vehicle. However,
in these cases, have the system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Key Registration Complete
This appears when a new Intelligent Key is
registered to the vehicle.
Shift to Park
This warning illuminates when the ignition
switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the
shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also,
a chime sounds when the ignition switch is
in the ACC or OFF position.
If this warning illuminates, move the shift
lever to the P (Park) position and start the
engine.

2-28 Instruments and controls

To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition switch in the ON position and then in
the LOCK position.
Push brake and start switch to drive
This indicator appears when the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position.
This indicator also appears when the vehicle has been started using the Remote
Engine Start (if so equipped) function.
This indicator means that the engine will
start by pushing the ignition switch with
the brake pedal depressed. You can start
the engine from any position of the ignition
switch.
Engine start operation for Intelligent
Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)
This indicator appears when the battery of
the Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key system and the vehicle are not
communicating normally.

If this appears, touch the ignition switch
with the Intelligent Key while depressing
the brake pedal. For additional information,
refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
Release Parking Brake
This warning illuminates in the message
area of the vehicle information display
when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven.
Low Fuel
This warning illuminates when the fuel level
in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as
soon as it is convenient, preferably before
the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There
will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank
when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0
(Empty).
Loose Fuel Cap
This warning appears when the fuel-filler
cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. For additional information, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the
“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual
This warning appears in the message area
of the vehicle information display if low oil
pressure is detected. This gauge is not designed to indicate low oil level. The low oil
pressure warning is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to
check the oil level. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.

this section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.

Low Washer Fluid
This warning illuminates when the
windshield-washer fluid is at a low level.
Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary.
For additional information, refer to
“Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.

Door Open

Tire Pressure Low - Add Air
This warning appears when the low tire
pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. The
warning appears each time the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position as long as
the low tire pressure warning light remains
illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the
vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of all
four tires to the recommended COLD tire
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information,
refer to “Low tire pressure warning light” in

Timer Alert — Have a break?

TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with your TPMS. If this warning comes
on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

This warning illuminates when a door has
been opened.
Trunk Open
This warning illuminates when the trunk
has been opened.

This indicator appears when the set time is
reached. The time can be set up to six
hours. For additional information, refer to
“Settings” in this section.
Low Outside Temperature
This warning appears if the outside temperature is below 37°F (3°C). The temperature can be changed to display in Celsius or
Fahrenheit. For additional information, refer to “Settings” in this section.

Power will turn off to save the battery
This message appears in the vehicle information display after a period of time if the
ignition switch is in the ACC or the ON position and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For additional information, refer to “Push-button ignition switch positions” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Power turned off to save the battery
This message appears after the ignition
switch is automatically turned off. For additional information, refer to “Push-button ignition switch positions” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Reminder: Turn OFF headlights
This warning appears when the headlights
are left in the ON position when exiting the
vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the
OFF or AUTO position. For additional information, refer to “Headlight and turn signal
switch” in this section.
Headlight System Error: See Owner’s
Manual (if so equipped)
This warning illuminates when there is an
error with the system. For additional information, refer to “Headlight and turn signal
switch” in this section.

Instruments and controls 2-29

Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s
Manual (if so equipped)
This warning illuminates when there is an
error with the system. For additional information, refer to “Front and rear sonar system” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so
equipped)
This indicator shows when the BSW and
RCTA systems are engaged.
For additional information, refer to “Blind
Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)
This warning appears when one or more of
the following systems (if so equipped) is
not functioning properly:
∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
∙ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

2-30 Instruments and controls

If one or more of these warning appears,
have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)
This indicator shows the cruise control system status.

This message appears when the Blind
Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable
because a radar blockage is detected. For
additional information, refer to “Blind Spot
Warning (BSW)” or “Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.

When cruise control is activated, a green
circle will illuminate to indicate it is set. The
vehicle information display will also display
the speed the cruise control was set at. If
you accelerate past the set speed, the
speed will blink until you either cancel
cruise control or go back to the set speed. If
cruise control is on and canceled, the
speed will be displayed to show the speed
the vehicle will return to if the resume button is activated.

Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if
so equipped)

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicator
(if so equipped)

This message appears when the Intelligent
Cruise Control (ICC), Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB), or Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) systems become unavailable because the front radar is obstructed. For additional information, refer
to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)”, “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)”, or “Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

This indicator shows the Intelligent Cruise
Control (ICC) system status. The status is
shown by the color. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)

SECURITY SYSTEMS
Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your
vehicle even if parking for a brief period.
Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and
always lock the vehicle when unattended.
Be aware of your surroundings, and park in
secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

This warning may appear if the extended
storage switch is not pushed in. When this
warning appears, push in the extended
storage switch to turn off the warning. For
additional information, refer to “Extended
storage switch” in this section.
Transmission Shift Position indicator
This indicator shows the transmission shift
position.
CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual
This warning illuminates when there is a
problem with the CVT system. If this warning comes on, have the system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

LIC0301

Your vehicle may have two types of security
systems:
∙ Vehicle security system
∙ NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual
and audible alarm signals if someone
opens the doors or trunk when the system
is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but
cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the

Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are
available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer
such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection
features.

How to arm the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows. (The system can be
armed even if the windows are open.)
2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.
3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The
doors can be locked with the Intelligent
Key, door handle request switch, or mechanical key.

Instruments and controls 2-31

4. Confirm that the
security indicator light stays on for about 30 seconds.
The vehicle security system is now prearmed. The vehicle security system will
automatically shift into the armed
security light begins
phase. The
to flash once every three seconds. If
during the pre-armed phase one of the
following occurs, the system will not
arm:
∙ Any door is unlocked with the mechanical key, the Intelligent Key or door request switch.
∙ Ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON
position.
∙ If the key is turned slowly when locking the door, the system may not arm.
Furthermore, if the key is turned beyond the vertical position toward the
unlock position to remove the key,
the system may be disarmed when
the key is removed. If the indicator
light fails to glow for a period of time,
unlock the door once and lock it
again.

∙ Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will
activate with all the doors closed and
locked with the ignition switch placed
in the LOCK position. When placing
the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, the system will be released.

button on the Intelligent Key,
ing the
or pushing the request switch on the driver’s or passenger’s door with the Intelligent
Key in range of the door handle.

Vehicle security system activation

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of a registered key.

The vehicle security system will give the
following alarm:
∙ The headlights blink and the horn
sounds intermittently.
∙ The alarm automatically turns off after
a period of time. However, the alarm
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered
with again. The alarm can be shut off by
unlocking the driver’s door or trunk lid
with the key, or by pressing the
button on the Intelligent Key.
The alarm is activated by:
∙ opening the door or trunk lid without
using the key or Intelligent Key (even if
the door is unlocked by releasing the
door inside lock switch).

How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking a door
or the trunk with the mechanical key, push-

2-32 Instruments and controls

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM

If the engine fails to start using a registered
key (for example, when interference is
caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the
engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the
ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the
device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN
recommends placing the registered key on
a separate key ring to avoid interference
from other devices.

If the light still remains on and/or the
engine will not start, seek service for the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all
registered keys that you have. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.

LIC0474

NOTE:

Security indicator light

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

The security indicator light blinks whenever
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF,
LOCK or ACC position.

For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System is operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is
malfunctioning, the light will remain on
while the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.

Instruments and controls 2-33

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

CAUTION
∙ Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.
∙ Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.

LIC2789

SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the windshield
and obscure your vision which may lead
to an accident. Warm the windshield
with the defroster before you wash the
windshield.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with windshield-washer
fluid concentrates at full strength.
Some
methyl
alcohol
based
windshield-washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the
grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before
pouring the fluid into the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir. Do not use the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
mix the windshield-washer fluid concentrate and water.

NOTE:
If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may
stop moving to protect its motor. If this
occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF
position and remove the snow or ice that
is on and around the wiper arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn the switch on
again to operate the wiper.
The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper
at the following speed:
1
䊊
2
䊊
3
䊊

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the
A (slower) or䊊
B (faster).
knob toward 䊊
Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation
High (HI) — continuous high speed operation

4 to have one sweep
Push the lever up 䊊
operation (MIST) of the wiper.
5 to operate the
Pull the lever toward you 䊊
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.

2-34 Instruments and controls

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH

LIC2324

Type A (if so equipped)
To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and push the rear window defroster
switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push
the switch again to turn the defroster off.
The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

LIC2325

LIC3240

Type B (if so equipped)

Type A (if so equipped)

NOTE:

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

The top and bottom few rows of wires on
the rear window are not part of the rear
window defroster system. These wires
make up the antenna for the audio system.

Lighting
1
䊊

2
䊊

Rotate the switch to the
position,
and the front parking, tail, license plate,
and instrument panel lights will come
on.
Rotate the switch to the
position,
and the headlights will come on and all
the other lights remain on.

When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window defroster.

Instruments and controls 2-35

∙ Turn on the headlights if the windshield
wipers make multiple continuous
passes within approximately one minute of the first pass (if so equipped). The
headlights remain on until the wipers
are turned off for a short period of time.
NOTE:
Autolight activation sensitivity and the
time delay for autolight shutoff can be
adjusted. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in
this section.
LIC3241

Type B (if so equipped)

CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.

LIC3188

Autolight system
The autolight system allows the headlights
to be set so they turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can:
∙ Turn on the headlights, front parking,
tail, license plate and instrument panel
lights automatically when it is dark.
∙ Turn off all the lights when it is light.
∙ Keep all the lights on for a period of time
after you place the ignition in the OFF
position and all doors are closed.

2-36 Instruments and controls

To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO
1 .
position 䊊
2. Place the ignition in the ON position.
3. The autolight system automatically
turns the headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF
and a door is opened and left open, the
headlights remain ON for a period of time. If
another door is opened while the headlights are on, then the timer is reset.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the
, or
position.
switch to the OFF,

3
䊊

Pulling and releasing the lever flashes
the headlight high beams on and off.
The low beams need not be engaged
for this function.

Battery saver system
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position while the headlight switch is in
or
position, the headlights
the
will turn off after a period of time.
NOTE:

WHA1170

Be sure you do not put anything on top of
the autolight sensor located in the top side
of the instrument panel. The autolight sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered,
the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark
out and the headlights will illuminate. If this
occurs while parked with the engine off
and the key in the ON position, your vehicle’s battery could become discharged.

LIC3192

Headlight beam select
1
䊊

2
䊊

To select the high beam function, ensure the low beams are engaged, and
push the lever forward. The high beam
indilights come on and the blue
cator light illuminates.
Pull the lever back to return to the low
beam.

The Battery Saver system may be disabled. For additional information, refer
to “Vehicle information display” in this
section.

CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature
automatically turns off the headlights
after a period of time, you should turn
the headlight switch to the OFF position
when the engine is not running to avoid
discharging the vehicle battery.

Instruments and controls 2-37

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL)
SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) portion
of the fog light assembly automatically illuminates when the engine is started with
the parking brake released. The DRL operate with the headlight switch in the OFF
position. Turn the headlight switch to
position for full illumination when
the
driving at night. (The DRL will turn off.)
If the parking brake is applied before the
engine is started, the DRL do not illuminate.
The DRL illuminate once the parking brake
is released. The DRL will remain on until the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight
switch ON for interior controls and
switches to illuminate, as those remain
OFF while the switch is in the OFF position.

WARNING
When the DRL system is active, tail
lights on your vehicle are not on. It is
necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an
accident injuring yourself and others.

2-38 Instruments and controls

LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
(DRL) SYSTEM (Type B) (if so
equipped)
The LED portion of the headlights automatically illuminate at 100% intensity when
the engine is started and the parking brake
released. The LED Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) operate with the headlight switch in
the OFF position. When you turn the headposition for full illulight switch to the
mination, the LED lights switch from LED
DRL to the park function.
If the parking brake is applied before the
engine is started, the LED DRL do not illuminate. The LED DRL illuminate when the
parking brake is released. The LED DRL will
remain on until the ignition switch is placed
in the OFF position.
It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight
switch ON for interior controls and
switches to illuminate, as those remain
OFF while the switch is in the OFF position.

WARNING
When the LED DRL system is active, tail
lights on your vehicle are not on. It is
necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an
accident injuring yourself and others.

Move the lever up or down until the
turn signal begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch, and release the lever.
The turn signal will automatically flash
three times.
Choose the appropriate method to signal
a lane change based on road and traffic
conditions.

LIC3176

LIC3252

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Press the “+” button to increase the brightness of instrument panel lights.

1
䊊

Turn signal

Press the “-” button to decrease the brightness of instrument panel lights.

Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is
completed, the turn signal cancels automatically.

Lane change signal
2
䊊

Move the lever up or down until the
turn signal begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch, to signal a lane change.
Hold the lever until the lane change is
completed.

Instruments and controls 2-39

HORN
The headlights must be on and the low
beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off
when the high beam headlights are selected.

LIC3256

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so
equipped)
To turn the fog lights on, rotate the headposition, then rolight switch to the
positate the fog light switch to the
tion.
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight
switch in the AUTO position, the headlights
must be on, then rotate the fog light switch
position.
to the
To turn the fog lights off, rotate the fog light
switch to the OFF position.

2-40 Instruments and controls

LIC2319

To sound the horn, push near the horn icon
on the steering wheel.

WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system.
Tampering with the supplemental front
air bag system may result in serious
personal injury.

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so
equipped)
CAUTION

LIC3037

WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use
the seat heater if you or the occupants
cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in
body parts that contact the seat. Use of
the seat heater by such people could
result in serious injury.

The front seats are warmed by built-in
heaters.

∙ The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

∙ Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,
as desired. The indicator light in the
switch will illuminate.

∙ Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket,
cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise,
the seat may become overheated.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater
on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.

∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy
on the seat or pierce it with a pin or
similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to push the
switch to turn it off.

∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with
a dry cloth.
∙ When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any
similar materials.
∙ If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn
the switch off and have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-41

HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH (if
so equipped)

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH
Push the switch again to turn the heated
steering wheel system off manually. The
indicator light will go off.
NOTE:
If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the
switch is turned on, the system will not
heat the steering wheel. This is not a
malfunction.

LIC0421

LIC3344

The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface
temperature of the steering wheel is below
68°F (20°C).

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC
system on for most driving conditions.

Push the heated steering wheel switch to
warm the steering wheel after the engine
starts. The indicator light will come on.
If the surface temperature of the steering
wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will
heat the steering wheel and cycle off and
on to maintain a temperature above 68°F
(20°C). The indicator light will remain on as
long as the system is on.

2-42 Instruments and controls

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the
VDC system reduces the engine output to
reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will
be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine
power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,
turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC
indicator and the AuOFF switch. The
tomatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system
warning light will come on.

E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH (if so
equipped)

POWER OUTLETS

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine to turn on the system. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

LIC3357

The E-call (SOS) switch is used in combination with a NissanConnect® Services subscription to call for assistance in case of an
emergency.
Pushing the switch will (with a paid subscription) reach a response specialist that
will provide assistance based on the situation described by the vehicle’s occupant.
For additional information, or to enroll your
vehicle, refer to www.NissanUSA.com/
connect or call 855–426–6628.

LIC3345

Instrument Panel
The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. They are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A)
maximum.
The power outlets are powered only when
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
Open the lower half of the console box to
access the power outlet. For additional information, refer to “Console box” in this section.

Instruments and controls 2-43

EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

∙ Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
∙ Use power outlets with the engine
running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
∙ Avoid using power outlets when the
air conditioner, headlights, or rear
window defroster is on.
∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
LIC3752

Center Console

CAUTION
∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
∙ Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter
unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. For additional information, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
∙ Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

2-44 Instruments and controls

∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug
may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.
∙ When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquid to contact the outlet.

LDI2758

STORAGE

LIC3266

Pulled position

LIC3268

Pushed position
The extended storage switch is used when
shipping the vehicle. It is located in the fuse
panel to the left of the steering wheel on
the instrument panel. If any electrical
equipment does not operate, ensure the
extended storage switch is pushed fully in
place, as shown.

LIC2308

FRONT-DOOR POCKETS

Instruments and controls 2-45

∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket or head restraint/head rest.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/head rest or in the seatback
pocket.

LIC1328

LIC2300

SEATBACK POCKETS

GLOVE BOX

The seatback pockets may be located on
the back of the driver’s and/or passenger’s
seats. The pockets can be used to store
maps.

Open the glove box by pulling the handle.
1 or
Use the master key when locking 䊊
2 the glove box.
unlocking 䊊

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the front
passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
System (if so equipped), please observe
the following items:

2-46 Instruments and controls

WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving
to help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.

WIC1120

LIC0702

CONSOLE BOX

Lower half

Upper half

Pull up on the passenger’s side latch to
open the lower half of the console box. A
power outlet is located inside the console
box.

Pull up on the driver’s side latch to open the
upper half of the console box.
The upper half of the console box may be
used for storage of cellular phones. An access hole is provided at the front of the
upper half of the console box for phone
cord routing to the power outlet.

LIC2312

OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES
STORAGE
To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release.
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the
holder.

WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed
while driving to avoid obstructing the
driver’s view and to help prevent an
accident.

Instruments and controls 2-47

CAUTION
∙ Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
∙ Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.

LIC3486

Rear

The rear center cup holders are located in
the rear fold-down armrest.

Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

WARNING
Avoid abrupt starting and braking
when the cup holder is being used to
prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is
hot, it can scald you or your passenger.

2-48 Instruments and controls

LIC2297

Front

WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
∙ Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle
while it is in motion and before closing
the windows. Use the window lock
switch to prevent unexpected use of
the power windows.

LIC2622

Soft bottle holder (front)

Soft bottle holder
CAUTION
∙ Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
∙ Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers.

LIC2296

Soft bottle holder (rear)

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended
in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a
warm day can quickly become high
enough to cause a significant risk of
injury or death to people and pets.
The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, or
for a period of time after the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s
or passenger’s door is opened during this
period of time, the power to the windows is
canceled.

Instruments and controls 2-49

Driver’s side power window
switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped
with switches to open or close all of the
windows.
To open a window, push the switch to the
detent and continue to hold down until the
desired window position is reached. To
close a window, pull the switch to the detent and continue to hold up until the desired window position is reached.
LIC3678

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Window lock button
Front passenger side switch
Right rear passenger side switch
Left rear passenger side switch
Driver’s side automatic switch

2-50 Instruments and controls

LIC2309

Front passenger’s power window
switch
The passenger’s window switch operates
only the corresponding passenger’s window. To open the window, push the switch
1 and continue to hold it
to the first detent 䊊
down until the desired window position is
reached. To close the window, pull the
2 and continue
switch to the first detent 䊊
to hold it up until the desired window position is reached.

Auto-reverse function
If the control unit detects something
caught in the window as it is closing, the
window will be immediately lowered.
The auto-reverse function can be activated when the window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position or for a period of
time after the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position.

LIC2663

LIC0410

Rear power window switch

Automatic operation

The rear power window switches open or
close only the corresponding windows. To
open the window, push the switch and hold
1 . To close the window, pull the
it down 䊊
2 .
switch up 䊊

To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, push the window
switch down to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window
automatically opens all the way. To stop
the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening.

Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock switch is depressed,
only the driver’s side window can be
opened or closed. Push it again to cancel
the window lock function.

Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or
load similar to something being caught
in the window occurs.

WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the
window.

To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pull the switch up to the
second detent and release it; it need not be
held. The window automatically closes all
the way. To stop the window, push the
switch down while the window is closing.

Instruments and controls 2-51

MOONROOF (if so equipped)
When power window switch does
not operate

way. To stop the roof, push the switch once
more while it is opening or closing.

If the power window automatic function
(closing only) does not operate properly,
perform the following procedure to initialize the power window system:

Tilting the moonroof
To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then
1
push the switch to the tilt up position 䊊
and release it; it need not be held. To tilt
down the moonroof, push the switch to the
2 .
tilt down position 䊊

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Open the window more than halfway
by operating the power window switch.
3. Pull the power window switch and hold
it to close the window, and then hold
the switch more than 3 seconds after
the window is closed.
4. Release the power window switch. Operate the window by the automatic
function to confirm the initialization is
complete. The power window automatically opens or closes depending
on if the automatic down or up function is selected.
5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for
other windows.
If the power window function does not operate properly after performing the above
procedure have the system checked and
repaired. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

2-52 Instruments and controls

Resetting the moonroof switch

LIC2313

POWER MOONROOF
The moonroof will only operate when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The power moonroof is operational for a
period of time, even if the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or OFF position. If the
driver’s door or the front passenger’s door
is opened during this period of time, the
power to the moonroof is canceled.

Sliding the moonroof
To fully open or close the moonroof, push
2 or close 䊊
1 posithe switch to the open 䊊
tion and release it; it need not be held. The
roof will automatically open or close all the

If the moonroof does not operate properly,
perform the following procedure to initialize the moonroof operation system.
1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by
repeatedly pushing the moonroof
1 to tilt the
switch to the close position 䊊
moonroof up.
2. Push and hold the switch to the close
1 .
position 䊊
3. Release the moonroof switch after the
moonroof moves slightly up and down.
4. Push and hold the switch to the open
2 to fully tilt the moonroof
position 䊊
down.
5. Check if the moonroof switch operates
normally.

If the moonroof does not operate properly
after performing the procedure above,
have your vehicle serviced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

Auto-reverse function (when
closing or tilting down the
moonroof)
The auto-reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or
tilted down by automatic operation when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or
load similar to something being caught
in the moonroof occurs.

When closing

CAUTION

If the control unit detects something
caught in the moonroof as it moves to the
front, the moonroof will immediately open
backward.
When tilting down
If the control unit detects something
caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the
moonroof will immediately tilt up.
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions
and repeats opening or tilting up the
moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down
switch within 5 seconds after it happens;
the moonroof will fully close gradually.
Make sure nothing is caught in the moonroof.

∙ Remove water drops, snow, ice or
sand from the moonroof before
opening.
∙ Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.

Sunshade
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it
forward or backward.

If the moonroof does not close
Have your moonroof checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
∙ In an accident you could be thrown
from the vehicle through an open
moonroof. Always use seat belts and
child restraints.
∙ Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out
of the moonroof opening while the
vehicle is in motion or while the
moonroof is closing.

Instruments and controls 2-53

INTERIOR LIGHTS
2
䊊

The interior lights can be set to operate
when the doors are opened. To turn off
the interior lights when a door open,
push the switch, the interior lights will
not illuminate, regardless of door position.
The lights will go off when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, or
the driver’s door is closed and locked.
The lights will also go off after a period
of time when the doors are open.

NOTE:
LIC2302
1
䊊

The interior light can be turned ON regardless of door position. The light will
go off after a period of time unless the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position when any door is opened.

The step lights illuminate when the
driver and passenger doors are opened
regardless of the interior light switch position. These lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while
doors are open to prevent the battery
from becoming discharged.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

2-54 Instruments and controls

LIC2303

CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)
The console light will turn on whenever the
parking lights or headlights are illuminated.

TRUNK LIGHT
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is
opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the
light goes off.
The light will go off after a period of time if
the trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
For additional information, refer to “Exterior
and interior lights” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.

LIC2304

LIC1083

MAP LIGHTS

PERSONAL LIGHTS

To turn the map lights on, push the
switches. To turn them off, push the
switches again.

To turn the rear personal lights on, push the
switch. To turn them off, push the switch
again.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

Instruments and controls 2-55

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the
functions of up to three individual handheld transmitters into one built-in device.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
∙ Will operate most radio frequency devices such as garage doors, gates,
home and office lighting, entry door
locks and security systems.
∙ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the
vehicle’s battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink® will retain all
programming.
When the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original
transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the
programmed
HomeLink®
Universal
Transceiver buttons should be erased for
security purposes. For additional information,
refer
to
“Programming
HomeLink®” in this section.

2-56 Instruments and controls

WARNING
∙ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal
safety standards. (These standards
became effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A
garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing
garage door and then automatically
stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a
garage door opener without these
features increases the risk of serious
injury or death.
∙ During the programming procedure
your garage door or security gate will
open and close (if the transmitter is
within range). Make sure that people
or objects are clear of the garage door,
gate, etc. that you are programming.

∙ Your vehicle’s engine should be
turned off while programming the
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. Do
not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness
or death.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
If you have any questions or are having
difficulty programming your HomeLink®
buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
NOTE:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC position when programming HomeLink®. It is
also recommended that a new battery
be placed in the hand-held transmitter
of the device being programmed to
HomeLink® for quicker programming
and accurate transmission of the radio
frequency.

NOTE:
Some devices may require you to replace
Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted
in “Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers” in this
section.
3. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.

LIC2365

LIC2366

1. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink® surface, keeping the
1 in view.
HomeLink® indicator light 䊊

2. Using both hands, simultaneously
press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button and hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT release until the
1 flashes
HomeLink® indicator light 䊊
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons
may be released. (The rapid flashing
indicates successful programming.)

1
is
∙ If the indicator light 䊊
solid/continuous, programming is
complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink® button
is pressed and released.
1 blinks rapidly
∙ If the indicator light 䊊
for 2 seconds and then turns to a
solid/continuous light, continue
with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device. A second person may make the
following steps easier. Use a ladder or
other device. Do not stand on your
vehicle to perform the next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage
door opener motor in the garage, locate the “learn” or “smart” button (the
name and color of the button may vary
by manufacturer but it is usually located near where the hanging an-

Instruments and controls 2-57

tenna wire is attached to the unit). If
there is difficulty locating the button,
reference the garage door opener’s
manual.
5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”
button.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press
and hold the trained HomeLink® button for 2 seconds and release. Repeat
the “press/hold/release” sequence up
to three times to complete the training
process. HomeLink® should now activate your rolling code equipped device.
7. If you have any questions or are having
difficulty
programming
your
HomeLink® buttons, refer to the
HomeLink®
web
site
at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-3553515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE
OPENERS
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
training. Similar to this Canadian law, some

2-58 Instruments and controls

U.S. gate operators are designed to “timeout” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties training a gate operator or garage
door opener by using the “Training” procedures, replace “Programming HomeLink®”
Step 2 with the following:
NOTE:
When programming a garage door
opener, etc., unplug the device during
the “cycling” process to prevent possible
damage to the garage door opener components.
1. For additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLink®” step 1 in this
section.
2. Using both hands, simultaneously
press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button and the hand-held transmitter
button. During training, your hand-held
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press and
hold the desired HomeLink® button
while you press and re-press (“cycle”)
your hand-held transmitter every
2 seconds until the frequency signal
has been learned. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly and then

rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training. DO NOT release until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons
may be released. The rapid flashing indicates successful training.
Proceed
with
“Programming
HomeLink®” step 3 to complete.
If the device was unplugged during the
programming procedure, remember
to plug it back in when programming is
completed.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after
it is programmed, can be used to activate
the programmed device. To operate, simply press and release the appropriate programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The amber indicator light will
illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any
time.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION

If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the
hand-held transmitter information:

The following procedure clears the programmed information from both buttons.
Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons can be reprogrammed. For additional information, refer
to “Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button” in this section.

∙ Replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.
∙ Position the hand-held transmitter with
its battery area facing away from the
HomeLink® surface.
∙ Press and hold both the HomeLink®
and hand-held transmitter buttons
without interruption.
∙ Position the hand-held transmitter 1 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds.
If HomeLink® is not programmed within
that time, try holding the transmitter in
another position – keeping the indicator
light in view at all times.
If you have any questions or are having
difficulty programming your HomeLink®
buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

To clear all programming:
1. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink® buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash in approximately
10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than
20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
HomeLink® is now in the programming
mode and can be programmed at any
time beginning with “Programming
HomeLink®” - Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINK® BUTTON

2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
HomeLink® button, proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico).
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The
new device can be activated by pressing
the HomeLink® button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect
any other programmed HomeLink® buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change
the codes of any non-rolling code device
that has been programmed into
HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual of
each device or call the manufacturer or
dealer of those devices for additional information.

To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver button, complete the following:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button. DO NOT release the button.

Instruments and controls 2-59

When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

2-60 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Locking with inside lock knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Automatic door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
How to use the remote keyless entry
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Warning lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . 3-17
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Remote Engine Start operating range . . . . . . . 3-20
Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Canceling a Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Conditions the Remote Engine Start will
not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Opener operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Interior trunk access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Opener operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Telescopic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Manual anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

KEYS
duplicates by using the key number.
NISSAN does not record key numbers so it
is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all keys and do not have one to
duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can
be duplicated without knowing the key
number.

CAUTION

LPD2076

Type A (if so equipped)

1.
2.
3.

Intelligent Keys (two sets)
Mechanical key
Key number plate (one plate)

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
Your vehicle can only be driven with the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to
your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System components.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. The
new keys must be registered prior to use

LPD2260

Type B (if so equipped)
with the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in
the Intelligent Key components when registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN
dealer.
A key number plate is supplied with your
keys. Record the key number and keep it in
a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the
vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent Key:
∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.
∙ Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely
dry.

Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot.

Valet hand-off

∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

When you have to leave a key with a valet,
give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep
the mechanical key with you to protect
your belongings.

∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with
a key holder that contains a magnet.

To prevent the glove box from being
opened during valet hand-off, follow the
procedures below:

∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment
and personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that
Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may
prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, it
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer.

1. Remove the mechanical key from the
Intelligent Key.

SPA1951

Mechanical key
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the
lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it
into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob
returns to the lock position.

2. Lock the glove box with the mechanical key.
3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet
and keep the mechanical key with you.
For additional information, refer to “Storage” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock
the doors and glove box.
For additional information, refer to “Doors”
in this section and “Storage” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

DOORS
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS

given to the dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your
vehicle.

You can only drive your vehicle using the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.
The mechanical key can be used for all the
locks.
Never leave the keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your existing key can be duplicated without knowing the key number. As many as four
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys
can be used with one vehicle. You should
bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to the NISSAN
dealer for registration. This is because the
registration process will erase the memory
of all key codes previously registered into
the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registration process, these components will only recognize keys coded into
the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
during registration. Any key that is not

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system
key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect system function.

When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors cannot be
opened using the inside or outside door
handles. The doors must be unlocked to
open the doors.

WARNING
∙ Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat
belts, this provides greater safety in
the event of an accident by helping to
prevent persons from being thrown
from the vehicle. This also helps keep
children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help
keep out intruders.
∙ Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows and/or inadvertent door lock activation, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others and/or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people
and/or pets.
LPD2777

LPD2092

Inside lock

Driver’s side

LOCKING WITH KEY

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as
shown.

To lock the door without the key, move the
1 ,
inside lock knob to the lock position 䊊
then close the door.

Manual (if so equipped)
To lock all doors, turn the key toward the
1 . To unlock a door,
front of the vehicle 䊊
turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle
2 .
䊊

To unlock the door without the key, move
the inside lock knob to the unlock position
2 .
䊊

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

Lockout protection
With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle
and any door open, all doors will unlock
automatically and a chime will sound after
the door is closed.
These functions help to prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked
inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
∙ All doors lock automatically when the
vehicle speed reaches 15 mph
(24 km/h).

LPD2093

LPD2570

∙ All doors unlock automatically when the
transmission is placed in the P (Park)
position or when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position.

Door lock switch

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passen1 . When
ger’s side) to the lock position 䊊
locking the door this way, be certain not to
leave the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push
the door lock switch (driver’s or front pas2 .
senger’s side) to the unlock position 䊊

NOTE:
The automatic door unlock function can
be changed using “Vehicle Settings” of
the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear
doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on
the edge of the rear doors.
2 ,
When the lever is in the unlock position 䊊
the door can be opened from the outside
or the inside.
1 ,
When the lever is in the LOCK position 䊊
the door can be opened only from the
outside.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
∙ The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pressed.
The FAA advises the radio waves may
affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate
the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not
operated unintentionally when the
unit is stored for a flight.
The Intelligent Key can operate all the door
locks using the remote control function or
pushing the request switch on the vehicle
without taking the key out from a pocket or
purse. The operating environment and/or
conditions may affect the Intelligent Key
operation.
Be sure to read the following before using
the Intelligent Key.

∙ When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter.

CAUTION
∙ Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you when operating the vehicle.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key.

∙ Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio
waves. The Intelligent Key transmits weak
radio waves. Environmental conditions
may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key under the following operating
conditions:
∙ When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted,
such as a TV tower, power station and
broadcasting station.
∙ When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone,
transceiver or a CB radio.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is in contact
with or covered by metallic materials.
∙ When any type of radio wave remote
control is used nearby.

Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the
battery’s life is approximately two years. If
the battery is discharged, replace it with a
new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an
indicator illuminates in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near
equipment which transmits strong radio
waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.
For additional information, refer to “Battery
replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section
of this manual.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed near
an electric appliance such as a personal
computer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. For
information about the purchase and use of
additional Intelligent Keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with
a key holder that contains a magnet.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment
and personal computers.

CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent Key:
∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that
Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may
prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, it
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer.

∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.
∙ Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.
∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely
dry.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2073

OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within the
specified operating range from the request
1 .
switch 䊊

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present
near the operating location, the Intelligent
Key system’s operating range becomes
narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not
function properly.

∙ To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you
carry the Intelligent Key with you and
then lock the doors.
∙ Do not pull the door handle before
pushing the door handle request
switch. The door will be unlocked but
will not open. Release the door handle
once and pull it again to open the door.

The operating range is within 31.50 in
1 .
(80 cm) from each request switch 䊊
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door
glass, handle or rear bumper, the request
switches may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even
someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the request switch to
lock/unlock the doors.

LPD2554

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
∙ Do not push the door handle request
switch with the Intelligent Key held in
your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the
Intelligent Key system to have difficulty
recognizing that the Intelligent Key is
outside the vehicle.
∙ After locking with the door handle request switch, verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

LPD2074

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without
taking the key out of your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,
you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing
the door handle request switch within the
range of operation.

LPD2622

Locking doors
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, place the ignition switch in the
LOCK position and make sure you carry
the Intelligent Key with you.
2. Close all doors.
3. Push any door handle request switch
1 while carrying the Intelligent Key
䊊
with you.
4. All doors and the trunk will lock.
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice
and the outside chime sounds twice.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2165

NOTE:
∙ Request switches for all doors and
trunk can be deactivated when the
I-Key Door Lock setting is switched to
OFF in the vehicle settings of the vehicle
information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information
display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
∙ Doors lock with the door handle request switch while the ignition switch is
not in the LOCK position.

∙ Doors do not lock by pushing the door
handle request switch while any door is
open. However, doors lock with the mechanical key even if any door is open.
∙ Doors do not lock with the door handle
request switch with the Intelligent Key
inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to
warn you. However, when an Intelligent
Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be
locked with another Intelligent Key.

CAUTION
∙ After locking the doors using the request switch, make sure that the
doors have been securely locked by
operating the door handle or the
trunk opener switch.
∙ When locking the doors using the request switch, make sure to have the
Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the request switch to
prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left in the vehicle.
∙ The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout
protection is equipped with the Intelligent
Key.
When the driver’s side door is open, the
doors are locked and then the Intelligent
Key is put inside the vehicle and all the
doors are closed; the lock will automatically unlock and the door chime sounds.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the door pockets.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on
or under the spare tire area.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside or near metallic materials.

NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelligent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch to lock the
door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse,
pocket or your other hand.

CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions:
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the rear parcel shelf.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the glove box or a storage bin.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

The interior light timer illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and
the room light is switched ON when the
door opens.
The interior light can be turned off without
waiting by performing one of the following
operations:
∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
∙ Locking the doors with the remote control.
LPD2622

Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the door handle request switch
1 .
䊊
3. The hazard warning lights flash once
and the outside chime sounds once.
4. Push the door handle request switch
1 again within 60 seconds to unlock
䊊
all doors and trunk. The outside chime
sounds again.

LPD2165

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking
the doors, that door may not be unlocked.
Returning the door handle to its original
position will unlock the door. If the door
does not unlock after returning the door
handle, push the door handle request
switch to unlock the door.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within one minute after pushing
the request switch:
∙ Opening any door.
∙ Pushing the ignition switch.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ Switching the room light switch to the
OFF position.

Lockout protection

CAUTION

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout
protection is equipped with the Intelligent
Key.

When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle.

When all doors are locked and the trunk lid
is closed with the Intelligent Key inside the
trunk, the outside buzzer will sound and the
trunk will open.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
LPD2077

Opening the trunk lid
To open the trunk lid, perform the following:
1. Push the trunk opener request switch
A for more than 1 second while carry䊊
ing the Intelligent Key with you.
2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will
sound four times.
3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a
distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the vehicle. The operating distance depends
upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function may not
function under the following conditions:
∙ When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
∙ When the doors or the trunk are open or
not closed securely.
∙ When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have
been securely locked by operating the
door handles.

LPD2257

Locking doors

LPD2258

Unlocking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.

1. Press the
Key.

2. Close all doors.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once,
and the driver’s door will unlock.

3. Press the
gent Key.

button on the Intelli-

4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice
and the horn beeps once.
5. All doors will be locked.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

button on the Intelligent

button again within
3. Press the
60 seconds to unlock all doors and
trunk.

NOTE:
The unlocking operation can be changed
in Selective door unlock in the vehicle
settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within one minute after pressing
button:
the
∙ Opening any doors.
∙ Pushing the ignition switch.
The interior light illuminates for a period of
time when a door is unlocked and the
room light switch is in the DOOR position.
The light can be turned off without waiting
by performing one of the following operations:

∙ Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the
OFF position in vehicle settings of the
vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.

Opening windows (if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key allows you to simultaneously open windows equipped with automatic operation.
∙ To open the windows, press the
button on the Intelligent Key longer
than 3 seconds after all doors are unlocked.
The door windows cannot be closed by
using the Intelligent Key.

WPD0364

Releasing the trunk lid
Press the
button for longer than
0.5 seconds to open the trunk lid. The trunk
release button will not operate when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
∙ Locking the doors with the Intelligent
Key.
∙ Switching off the room light switch.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

∙ The request switch on the driver or passenger door has been pushed and the
Intelligent Key is in range of the door
handle.

WPD0361

LPD2259

Using the panic alarm

Answer back horn feature

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to
call attention by pressing and holding
button on the Intelligent Key for
the
longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on
for a period of time.

If desired, the answer back horn feature
can be deactivated using the Intelligent
Key. When it is deactivated and the
button is pressed, the hazard indicator
button is
lights flash twice. When the
pressed, neither the hazard indicator lights
nor the horn operates.

The panic alarm stops when:
∙ It has run for a period of time, or
∙ Any button is pressed on the Intelligent
Key.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

CAUTION

If you change the answer back horn and
light flash feature with the Intelligent
Key, the vehicle information display
screen will show the current mode after
the ignition switch has been cycled from
the OFF to the ON position. The vehicle
information display screen can also be
used to change the answer back horn
mode.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard indicator lights will flash three
times to confirm that the answer back
horn feature has been deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
The hazard indicator lights will flash once
and the horn will sound once to confirm
that the horn beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does
not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

When the buzzer sounds and the warning appears, be sure to check both the
vehicle and the Intelligent Key.

WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly by erroneous operation of
the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the
vehicle from being stolen, a chime or
buzzer sounds from inside and outside the
vehicle and a warning is displayed in the
instrument panel.
1
䊊
2
䊊

LPD2628

P (Park) position selecting warning
NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning

WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE
REMINDERS
The Intelligent Key is equipped with a function that is designed to minimize improper
operations and to help prevent the vehicle
from being stolen. The warning buzzer
sounds and the warning appears when improper operations are detected.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning
is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle
and the Intelligent Key.
For additional information, refer to
“Troubleshooting guide” in this section and
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that
are programmed for the vehicle. If another
Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle system may respond differently than expected.
Symptom
The Shift to Park warning appears in
When stopping the engine
the display and the inside warning
chime sounds continuously.
The Door Open warning appears in
When opening the driver’s door to get
the display and the inside warning
out of the vehicle
chime sounds continuously.
The No Key Detected warning appears
in the display, the outside chime
sounds three times and the inside
warning chime sounds for approxiWhen closing the door after getting
mately 3 seconds.
out of the vehicle
The Shift to Park warning appears in
the display and the outside chime
sounds continuously.
The outside chime sounds for approxiWhen closing the door with the inside
mately 3 seconds and all the doors
lock knob turned to LOCK
unlock.
When pushing the door handle reThe outside chime sounds for approxibutton
quest switch or the
mately 2 seconds.
on the Intelligent Key to lock the door

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Possible Cause
The shift lever is not in the P (Park)
position.

Remedy
Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position.

The ignition switch is in the ACC
position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position and the shift lever is not in the P
(Park) position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and place the ignition switch in
the OFF position.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

Symptom

Possible Cause

The Key Battery Low indicator appears
The battery charge is low.
in the display.
When pushing the ignition switch to
start the engine

When pressing the ignition switch

The KEY ID Incorrect warning appears
in the display, the outside chime
sounds three times and the inside
warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds.
The Intelligent Key system warning
light in the meter illuminates in yellow.

Remedy
Replace the battery with a new one.
For additional information, refer to
“Battery replacement” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

It warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system.

It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so
equipped)
∙ Vehicles with an automatic climate
control system will default to either a
heating or cooling mode depending on
outside and cabin temperatures. For
additional information, refer to “Remote
Engine Start with Intelligent Climate
Control” in the “Monitor, climate, audio,
phone and voice recognition systems”
section of the manual.

LPD2078

The
button will be on the NISSAN Intelligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote Engine Start. This feature allows the engine to
start from outside the vehicle.
The following features may be affected
when Remote Engine Start is used:
∙ Vehicles with a manual climate control
system will default to the last used
heating or cooling mode.

Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote starters. For example, some laws require a person using
Remote Engine Start to have the vehicle in
view. Check local regulations for any requirements.
Other conditions may affect the function of
the Remote Engine Start feature. For additional information, refer to “Conditions the
Remote Engine Start will not work” in this
section.
Other conditions can affect the performance of the Intelligent Key transmitter.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in this section.

REMOTE ENGINE START
OPERATING RANGE
WARNING
To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent
door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance
of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can
quickly become high enough to cause a
significant risk of injury or death to
people and pets.

CAUTION
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or other strong radio wave
sources are present near the operating
location, the Intelligent Key operating
range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
The Remote Engine Start function can only
be used when the Intelligent Key is within
the specified operating range from the vehicle.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The Remote Engine Start operating range
is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE
To use the Remote Engine Start feature to
start the engine perform the following:
1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.
2. Press the
doors.

button to lock all

3. Within 5 seconds press and hold
button until the turn signal
the
lights flash and the tail lamps turn on. If
the vehicle is not within view press and
button for at least 2 sechold the
onds.
The following events will occur when the
engine starts:
∙ The parking lights will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running.
∙ The doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.

∙ The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend
the time for an additional 10 minutes.
For additional information, refer to “Extending engine run time” in this section.
Depress and hold the brake then push the
push-button ignition switch to the ON position before driving. For additional information, refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME
The Remote Engine Start feature can be
extended one time by performing the
steps listed in “Remote starting the vehicle”
in this section. Run time will be calculated
as follows:
∙ The first 10 minute run time will start
when the Remote Engine Start function
is performed.
∙ The second 10 minutes will start immediately when the Remote Engine Start
function is performed again. For example, if the engine has been running
for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are
added, the engine will run for a total of
15 minutes.

∙ Extending engine run time will count towards the two Remote Engine Start
limit.
A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts,
or a single Remote Engine Start with an
extension, are allowed between ignition
cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled
to the ON position and then back to the
OFF position before the Remote Engine
Start procedure can be used again.

CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE
START
To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform
one of the following:
∙ Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle
until the parking lights
and press
turn off.
∙ Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
∙ Cycle the ignition switch ON and then
OFF.
∙ The extended engine run time has expired.
∙ The first 10 minute timer has expired.
∙ The engine hood has been opened.
∙ The shift lever is moved out of park.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry
into the vehicle.
∙ The ignition switch is pushed without
an Intelligent Key in the vehicle.
∙ The ignition switch is pushed with an
Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the
brake pedal is not depressed.

∙ The
button is not pressed and
held within 5 seconds of pressing the
lock button.
∙ The brake is pressed.
∙ The doors are not closed and locked.
∙ The trunk is open.

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE
START WILL NOT WORK

∙ The I–Key Indicator Light remains solid
in the vehicle information display.

The Remote Engine Start will not operate if
any of the following conditions are present:

∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry
into the vehicle.

∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.

∙ Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single
Remote Engine Start with an extension,
have already been used.

∙ The hood is not securely closed.
∙ The hazard indicator lights are on.
∙ The engine is still running. The engine
must be completely stopped. Wait at
least 6 seconds if the engine goes from
running to off. This is not applicable
when extending engine run time.
button is not pressed and
∙ The
held for at least 2 seconds.

∙ The vehicle is not in P (Park).
∙ There is a detected registered key already inside of the vehicle.
∙ The Remote Engine Start function has
been switched to the OFF position in
Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information,
refer to “Vehicle information display” in
the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The Remote Engine Start may display a
warning or indicator in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

HOOD

WARNING
∙ Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving. The
vehicle should only ever be operated
with the hood securely closed.
∙ If you see steam or smoke coming
from the engine compartment, to
avoid injury do not open the hood.

LPD2778
1
1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊
located below the driver’s side instrument panel; the hood springs up
slightly.
2
2. To open the hood, push the lever 䊊
underneath the front of the hood to the
side with your fingertips as illustrated
and raise the hood.

5. When closing the hood, return the support rod to its original position, lower
the hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm)
above the latch and release it. This allows proper engagement of the hood
latch.

3. Remove the support rod from the
3 .
clamp 䊊

4 into the slot
4. Insert the support rod 䊊
on the passenger side of the hood.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

TRUNK LID

LPD2707

WPD0364

Intelligent Key

Instrument panel

OPENER OPERATION
WARNING
∙ Do not drive with the trunk lid open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust
gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For
additional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of the
manual.

∙ Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously
injured. Keep the car locked, with the
rear seatback and trunk lid securely
latched when not in use, and prevent
children’s access to car keys.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2077

Request switch
To open the trunk lid perform one of the
following after unlocking all doors:
∙ Press the button on the instrument
panel.
∙ Press the button on the Intelligent Key.
A release switch.
∙ Push the 䊊

To close the trunk lid, lower and push the
trunk lid down securely.

NOTE:

The interior trunk lid release mechanism
provides a means of escape for children
and adults in the event they become
locked inside the trunk.
To open the trunk from the inside, pull the
illuminated release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The
release handle is made of a material that
glows in the dark after a brief exposure to
ambient light.

Request switches for all doors and trunk
can be deactivated when the I-Key Door
Lock setting is switched to OFF in the
“Vehicle Settings” of the vehicle information display. For additional information,
refer to “Vehicle information display” in
the “Instruments and controls” section
of the manual.

The handle is located inside the trunk compartment on the interior of the trunk lid.
LPD2081

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

INTERIOR TRUNK ACCESS
The trunk can be accessed from the passenger side of the rear seat.

WARNING
Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.

1. Move the front passenger seat to the
most forward position.
2. Open the access cover on the rear parcel shelf.
3. Push down on the button on the rear
parcel shelf.
4. Fold down the passenger’s side seatback.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

FUEL-FILLER DOOR
FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING
∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and
do not smoke or allow open flames or
sparks near the vehicle when
refueling.

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in
an accident or sudden stop.

LPD2647

OPENER OPERATION
The fuel-filler door release is located below
the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler
door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuelfiller door securely.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling
may cause fuel overflow, resulting in
fuel spray and possibly a fire.
∙ Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has
a built-in safety valve needed for
proper operation of the fuel system
and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could
Malfunction Indialso cause the
cator Light (MIL) to come on.
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body
to attempt to start your vehicle.

∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable
fuel containers:
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are
filling it.
– Use only approved portable fuel
containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION
∙ Do not use a fuel that contains more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For
additional information, refer to “Fuel
recommendation” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of
this manual.

∙ The Loose Fuel Cap warning message
will be displayed/warning will appear
if the fuel-filler cap is not properly
tightened. It may take a few driving
trips for the message to be displayed.
Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
properly after the Loose Fuel Cap
warning
message
is
displayed/warning appears may
Malfunction Indicator
cause the
Light (MIL) to illuminate.

∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
NOTE:
Changing ignition switch status during
the refueling process may cause a delay
in fuel gauge response.

∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
Malproperly may cause the
function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumilight illuminates benate. If the
cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
continue to drive the vehicle.
light should turn off after a
The
few driving trips. If the
light does
not turn off after a few driving trips,
have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

STEERING WHEEL

WARNING
∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.

LPD2082

To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to remove.
2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder
1 while refueling.
䊊
To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the
fuel-filler tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a
single click is heard.

LPD2619

Loose Fuel Cap warning
The Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the
vehicle information display when the fuelfiller cap is not tightened correctly after the
vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few
driving trips for the message to be displayed. To turn off the warning, perform the
following:
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as
soon as possible. For additional information, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in this
section.
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for
proper steering operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates with
great force. If you are unrestrained,
leaning forward, sitting sideways or
out of position in any way, you are at
greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or
fatal injuries from the air bag if you
are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback
and as far away as practical from the
steering wheel. Always use the seat
belts.

SUN VISORS
1. To block glare from the front, swing
1 .
down the main sun visor 䊊
2. To block glare from the side, remove
2 from the center
the main sun visor 䊊
mount and swing the visor to the side.
3. To extend the sun visor, slide in or out
3 .
as needed 䊊

CAUTION
∙ Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original
position.
∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcedly downward.

LPD2100

TILT OPERATION
1 and adjust the
Pull the lock lever down 䊊
2 to the desteering wheel up or down 䊊
sired position.
1 firmly to lock the
Push the lock lever up 䊊
steering wheel in place.

TELESCOPIC OPERATION
1 and adjust the
Pull the lock lever down 䊊
3 to
steering wheel forward or backward 䊊
the desired position.
1 firmly to lock the
Push the lock lever up 䊊
steering wheel in place.

WPD0344

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

MIRRORS
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims during night time conditions and according to the intensity of the
headlights of the vehicle following you. The
automatic anti-glare feature is activated
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
2 will illuminate when
The indicator light 䊊
the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
LPD2589

VANITY MIRRORS
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun
visor down and flip open the mirror cover.
Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and
turn on when the mirror cover is open.

WPD0126

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW
MIRROR (if so equipped)
1 to reduce glare
Use the night position 䊊
from the headlights of vehicles behind you
at night.
2 when driving in
Use the day position 䊊
daylight hours.

WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view
clarity.

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:
Do not hang any objects over the sen1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors 䊊
sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity
of the sensors, resulting in improper operation.

For additional information on HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver operation (if so
equipped), refer to the “HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
For additional information on the compass
3 (if so equipped), refer to “Comdisplay 䊊
pass display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

LPD0469

LPD2419

Type A - Without compass
(if so equipped)

Type B - With compass (if so equipped)
The indicator light will turn off.

Type A (if so equipped) and Type B
(if so equipped)

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature
again, press:

2 will illuminate when
The indicator light 䊊
the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

∙ The | button for inside mirrors without compass.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature,
press:

button for inside mirrors with
∙ The
compass.
The indicator light will turn on.

∙ The O button for inside mirrors without compass.
button for inside mirrors with
∙ The
compass.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

The outside mirror remote control only operates when the ignition switch is placed in
the ACC or ON position.
1 to select the right
Move the small switch 䊊
or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the de2 .
sired position using the large switch 䊊
1 to the center
Move the small switch 䊊
(neutral) position to prevent accidentally
moving the mirror.

LPD2452

OUTSIDE MIRRORS
WARNING
∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror
on the passenger side are closer than
they appear. Be careful when moving
to the right. Using only this mirror
could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to
other objects.

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2084

Manual folding outside mirrors (if
so equipped)
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to
fold it.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
Some outside mirrors can be heated to
defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, refer to
“Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

MEMO

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems
NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
How to read the displayed lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Difference between predicted and
actual distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
How to park with predicted course
lines (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
How to turn on and off predictive
course lines (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . 4-10
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Heater and air conditioner (manual)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-25
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection
port (models without Navigation
System) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
iPod®* player operation without
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Bluetooth® streaming audio without
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
CD care and cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Steering wheel switch for audio control. . . . . .4-48
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

Siri® Activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Operating Siri® Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Changing Siri® Eyes Free Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
without Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-54
Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Using the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58

Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Ending a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66

NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’S
MANUAL
Refer to the NissanConnect® Owner’s
Manual that includes the following information.
∙ NissanConnect® Services
∙ Navigation system (if so equipped)
∙ Audio system
∙ Apple CarPlayTM
∙ Android AutoTM
∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system
∙ Viewing information
∙ Other settings
∙ Voice recognition
∙ General system information

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REARVIEW MONITOR

LHA4459

WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView Monitor system could result in
serious injury or death.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience
feature and is not a substitute for
proper backing. Always turn and look
out the windows and check mirrors to
be sure that it is safe to move before
operating the vehicle. Always back up
slowly.
∙ The system is designed as an aid to
the driver in showing large stationary
objects directly behind the vehicle, to
help avoid damaging the vehicle.
∙ The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a
reference only when the vehicle is on a
level paved surface. The distance
viewed on the monitor is for reference
only and may be different than the
actual distance between the vehicle
and displayed objects.

CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of
the camera.

LHA4643

To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor system uses a camera located just
1 .
above the vehicle’s license plate䊊

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the RearView Monitor.

The RearView Monitor system automatically shows a rear view of the vehicle when
the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)
position. The radio can still be heard while
the RearView monitor is active.

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1196

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle
width and distances to objects with referA are disence to the vehicle body line 䊊
played on the monitor.
Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
∙ Red line 䊊
2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)
∙ Yellow line 䊊
3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)
∙ Green line 䊊

4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m)
∙ Green line 䊊

5
Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing
up.

as you are backing up, or park and exit the
vehicle to view the positioning of objects
behind the vehicle.

6 (if so equipped)
Predicted course lines 䊊

Indicate the predicted course when backing up. The predicted course lines will be
displayed on the monitor when the shift
lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the
steering wheel is turned. The predicted
course lines will move depending on how
much the steering wheel is turned and will
not be displayed while the steering wheel is
in the straight-ahead position.
The vehicle width guide lines and the width
of the predicted course lines are wider than
the actual width and course.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate
reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill
surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from
those displayed in the monitor relative to
the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
in doubt, turn around and view the objects

LHA4011

Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
further than it appears on the monitor.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

on the hill is closer than it appears on the
monitor.

LHA4012

Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill,
the distance guide lines and the vehicle
width guide lines are shown farther than
the actual distance. Note that any object

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1201

Backing up near a projecting
object
A (if so
The predicted course lines 䊊
equipped) do not touch the object in the
display. However, the vehicle may hit the

A
object when backing up to the position 䊊
if the object projects over the actual backing up course.

object if it projects over the actual backing
up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED
COURSE LINES (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines
may be displayed incorrectly.
∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between
the predicted course line and the actual course line.
∙ If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted
course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform
the following procedures:
LHA4013

Backing up behind a projecting
object
C is shown farther than the
The position 䊊
B in the display. However, the poposition 䊊
C is actually at the same distance as
sition 䊊
A . The vehicle may hit the
the position 䊊

– Turn the steering wheel from lock
to lock while the engine is running.
– Drive the vehicle on a straight road
for more than 5 minutes.
∙ When the steering wheel is turned
with the ignition switch in the ACC position, the predicted course lines may
be displayed incorrectly.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
D parallel
the vehicle width guide lines 䊊
C while referring
to the parking space 䊊
to the predicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
completely, move the shift lever to the
P (Park) position and apply the parking
brake.

LHA1197

LHA1198

1. Visually check that the parking space is
safe before parking your vehicle.

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting
the steering wheel so that the preB enter the parkdicted course lines 䊊
C .
ing space 䊊

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed
A when the shift lever is
on the screen 䊊
moved to the R (Reverse) position.

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5. Adjust
the
level
using
the
TUNE/FOLDER knob and then press
the ENTER/SETTING button to apply
the adjustment.
NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings
of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly applied.

LHA3522

Models with navigation system

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
Models with navigation system:
1. While on a Rearview Monitor screen,
touch the touch-screen display.
2. Touch the Display Settings key.
3. Touch the “Brightness,” “Contrast,” “Tint,”
“Color,” or “Black Level” key.
4. Adjust the item by touching the + or –
key on the touch-screen display.

LHA3639

Models without navigation system
NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings
of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly applied.

HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINES (if so
equipped)
To toggle ON and OFF the predictive course
lines while in the P (Park) position:
1. Touch the Settings key.
2. Touch the arrow key to tab to the next
screen, then press the Camera key.
3. Touch the Predictive Course Lines key
to turn the feature ON or OFF.

Models without navigation system:
1. Firmly apply the brake and place the
shift lever in R (reverse).
2. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

To toggle ON and OFF the predictive course
lines while in the R (Reverse) position:

3. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to highlight
the “Brightness” or “Contrast” option.

2. Touch the Predictive Course Lines key
to turn the feature ON or OFF.

1. Touch the touch-screen display.

4. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The system cannot completely eliminate blind spots and may not show
every object.
∙ Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be
viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation. The system will not show small
objects below the bumper, and may
not show objects close to the bumper
or on the ground.
∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used.
∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will
appear visually opposite compared to
when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.

∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.
The lines are highly affected by the
number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and
road grade.
∙ Make sure that the trunk is securely
closed when backing up.
∙ Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is installed above the license plate.
∙ When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing
water condensation on the lens, a
malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

∙ When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on
the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper.
∙ The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
∙ The colors of objects on the RearView
Monitor may differ somewhat from the
actual color of objects.
∙ Objects on the monitor may not be
clear in a dark environment.
∙ There may be a delay when switching
between views.

∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may
malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the
camera, the RearView Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the camera.

The following are operating limitations and
do not represent a system malfunction:

∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

∙ When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not clearly
display objects.

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

VENTS
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
1 , the RearView Monitor may not
camera 䊊
display objects clearly. Clean the camera
by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a
diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

LHA4643

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.

LHA4129

Side
Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent
slides.
Open or close the vents by using the dial.
to open the
Move the dial toward the
vents or toward the
to close them.

∙ Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

LHA4128

Center

LHA1134

Rear (if so equipped)

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.
NOTE:
LHA2243

1.
2.
3.
4.

Fan speed control dial/ A/C
(air conditioner) button
Air flow control buttons
Temperature control dial / MAX A/C
button
Air recirculation button

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster
switch
Front windshield defroster
button

∙ Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner
unit. Odor can enter the passenger
compartment through the vents.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

∙ When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help
reduce odors inside the vehicle.

CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The
fan control dial turns the fan on
and off, and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons
The air flow control buttons allow you to
select the air flow outlets.

MAX
A/C

— Air flows from center and side
vents with maximum cooling.
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.

Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to
adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To
lower the temperature, turn the dial to the
left. To increase the temperature, turn the
dial to the right.

Air recirculation button
On position (Indicator light on):
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
Press the
when:

button to the ON position

∙ driving on a dusty road.
∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering
passenger compartment.
∙ for maximum cooling when using the
air conditioner.
Off position (Indicator light off):
Outside air is drawn into the passenger
compartment and distributed through the
selected outlet.
Use the off position for normal heater or air
conditioner operation.

Air conditioner button
Start the engine, turn the
fan control
dial to the desired position and press
button to turn on the air condithe
tioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press
button again.
the
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
For additional information, refer to “Rear
window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION
Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to
the foot outlets. Some air also flows from
the defrost outlets and the side vent outlets.
button to the OFF posi1. Press the
tion for normal heating.
2. Press the

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

air flow control button.

3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.

Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side
and center vents.
1. Press the
tion.

button to the OFF posi-

2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost
outlets to defrost/defog the windows.
1. Press the defrost/defog button

2. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.

∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the
fan control dial
windows, turn the
to the highest setting and the temperature control to the full HOT position.
position is selected, the
∙ When the
air conditioner automatically turns on if
the outside temperature is more than
36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air
which helps defog the windshield.
mode automatically turns off,
The
allowing outside air to be drawn into the
passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance. The
recirculation mode cannot be activated
position.
in the

Bi-level heating
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to
the side and center vents and to the front
and rear floor outlets.
1. Press the
tion.

button to the OFF posi-

2. Press the

air flow control button.

Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs
the windshield.
1. Press the

air flow control button.

2. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
position is selected, the
∙ When the
air conditioner automatically turns on if
the outside temperature is more than
36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air
which helps defog the windshield.
mode automatically turns off,
The
allowing outside air to be drawn into the
passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield.
This improves heater operation.

3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
Start the engine, turn the
fan control
dial to the desired position, and press
button to activate the air condithe
tioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions are
added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify
the air.

∙ For quick cooling when the outside
temperature is high, press the
button to the ON position. Be sure to
to the OFF position for
return the
normal cooling. MAX A/C may be used
for quick cooling.

Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify
the air.
1. Press the
tion.

button to the OFF posi-

2. Press the

air flow control button.

button to the OFF posi-

3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.

2. Press the

air flow control button.

4. Press the A/C button. The indicator
light comes on.

4. Press the A/C button. The indicator
light comes on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows
and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the

3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

Operating tips

1. Press the
tion.

3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.

or
are selected,
∙ When the
the air conditioner automatically turns
on if the outside temperature is more
than 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air
which helps defog the windshield.
mode automatically turns off,
The
allowing outside air to be drawn into the
passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

air flow control button.

2. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ Keep the windows closed while the air
conditioner is in operation.
∙ After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or
3 minutes with the windows open to
vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows.
This allows the air conditioner to cool
the interior more quickly.
∙ The air conditioning system should
be operated for approximately
10 minutes at least once a month.
This helps prevent damage to the
system due to lack of lubrication.

∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from
the ventilators in hot, humid conditions
as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
∙ If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. For additional
information, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and
dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK
heating, cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation button should always be in
the OFF position for heating and defrosting.

LHA3787

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

LHA3788

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA3789

LHA3790

LHA4503

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped)
8.
9.
10.
11.

MODE (manual air flow control)
button
fan speed control buttons
ON-OFF button
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster
switch
WARNING

∙ The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.

LHA2244

1.
2.

Front defroster button
Temperature control dial (driver’s
side)/AUTO (automatic) climate
control button
Display screen

5.
6.
7.

Temperature control dial (passenger’s side)/DUAL (passenger’s side
temperature control) button
Fresh air intake button
Air recirculation button
A/C air conditioner button

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.
Start the engine and operate the controls
to activate the air conditioner.

NOTE:
∙ Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner
unit. Odor can enter the passenger
compartment through the vents.
∙ When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help
reduce odors inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling and/or dehumidified
heating (AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round as
the system automatically works to keep a
constant temperature. Air flow distribution,
air intake control, and fan speed are also
controlled automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button on.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to
the left or right to set the desired temperature.
∙ Adjust the temperature display to
about 75°F (24°C) for normal operation.

∙ The temperature of the passenger
compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution, air intake
control and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from
the vents in hot, humid conditions as
the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
3. You can individually set driver’s and
front passenger’s side temperature using each temperature control dial. To
turn off the passenger’s side temperature control, press the DUAL button.

Heating (A/C OFF)
The air conditioner does not activate. When
you need to heat only, use this mode.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set
the desired temperature.

∙ Do not set the temperature lower than
the outside air temperature. Otherwise,
the system may not work properly.
∙ Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or
defogging
1. Press the
on.

front defroster button

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set
the desired temperature.
∙ To quickly remove ice from the outside
fan speed
of the windows, use the
control buttons to set the fan speed to
maximum.
∙ As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, press the AUTO button to
return to the automatic mode.

∙ The temperature of the passenger
compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan
speed are also controlled automatically.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

∙ When the
front defroster button is
pressed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 36°F (2°C). The air recirculate mode automatically turns off,
allowing outside air to be drawn into the
passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

Remote Engine Start with
Intelligent Climate Control (if so
equipped)
Vehicles equipped with automatic climate
controls and Remote Engine Start function
may go into automatic heating or cooling
mode when Remote Engine Start is activated depending on outside and cabin
temperatures. During this period, the climate control display and buttons will be
inoperable until the ignition switch is
turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrosting mode, the rear window defroster and
heated steering wheel (if so equipped) may
be activated automatically.

MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
Press the
fan speed control buttons
to manually control the fan speed.
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Temperature control dial

Fresh air intake
Press the
fresh air intake button to
draw outside air into the passenger compartment.

Air conditioner button

The temperature control dial allows you to
adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To
lower the temperature, turn the dial to the
left. To increase the temperature, turn the
dial to the right. Temperature can be adjusted on the driver’s and passenger’s side.

Start the engine, press the
fan control
buttons to the desired position and press
button to turn on the air condithe
tioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press
button again.
the
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Air recirculation

Air flow control

Press the
air recirculation button to
recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.
indicator light on the button will
The
come on.
The air recirculation cannot be activated
when the air conditioner is in the
front defrosting mode.
When the outside temperature exceeds 70°F
(21°C), the air conditioning system may default to air recirculation mode automatically
to reduce overall power consumption. To exit
air recirculation mode, select the fresh air
intake button to enter fresh air mode.

Pressing the MODE button manually controls air flow and selects the air outlet:

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster and
foot outlets.

To turn system off

∙ When the climate system is in automatic operation and the engine coolant
temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow outlet may default to defroster mode for a maximum
of 2 minutes 30 seconds. This is not a
malfunction. After the engine coolant
temperature warms up, the air flow outlet will return to foot mode and operation will continue normally.

Press the ON-OFF button.

LHA1136

OPERATING TIPS
The sunload sensor, located on the top
driver’s side of the instrument panel, helps
the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this
sensor.

∙ When the outside and interior cabin
temperatures are moderate to high, the
intake setting may default to turn off air
recirculation to allow fresh air into the
passenger compartment. You may notice air flow from the foot mode, bi-level
mode, or side demist vent outlets for a
maximum of 15 seconds. This may occur when previous climate setting was
system off. This is not a malfunction.
After the initial warm air is expelled, the
intake will return to automatic control,
air flow outlet will return to previous settings, and operation will continue normally. To exit, press any climate control
button.
∙ Keep the moonroof (if so equipped)
closed while the air conditioner is in operation.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

∙ If you feel that the air flow mode you
have selected and the outlets the air is
coming out do not match, select
mode.
the
∙ When you change the air flow mode,
you may feel air flow from the feet vents
for just a moment. This is not a malfunction.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

AUDIO SYSTEM

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind.
This refrigerant does not harm the
earth’s ozone layer.

RADIO

Special charging equipment and lubricant
is required when servicing your NISSAN air
conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or
lubricants will cause severe damage to
your air conditioner system. For additional
information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations”
in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer to service your “environmentally
friendly” air conditioner system.

WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid
personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced
technician
with
proper
equipment.

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON
POWER button to
position, press the
turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio
with the engine not running, the ignition
should be placed in the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other
external influences. Intermittent changes
in reception quality normally are caused by
these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are
designed to extend reception range, and to
enhance the quality of that reception.
However, there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals
that can affect radio reception quality in a
moving vehicle, even when the finest
equipment is used. These characteristics
are completely normal in a given reception

area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.
Reception conditions will constantly
change because of vehicle movement.
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work
against ideal reception. Described below
are some of the factors that can affect your
radio reception.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers.
Storing the device in a different location
may reduce or eliminate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 –
30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single
channel) FM having slightly more range
than stereo FM. External influences may
sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25
mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is
directly related to the distance between
the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of
the same characteristics as light. For example, they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away
from a station transmitter, the signals will
tend to fade and/or drift.

for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles
exist.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to
antenna position (usually in conjunction
with increased distance from the station
transmitter), static or flutter can be heard.
This can be reduced by adjusting the treble
control to reduce treble response.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic
lights.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and
reflected signals reach the receiver at the
same time. The signals may cancel each
other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss
of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency,
can bend around objects and skip along
the ground. In addition, the signals can be
bounced off the ionosphere and bent back
to earth. Because of these characteristics,
AM signals are also subject to interference
as they travel from transmitter to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas
with many tall buildings. It can also occur

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
equipped)
When the satellite radio is used for the first
time or the battery has been replaced, the
satellite radio may not work properly. This
is not a malfunction. Wait more than
10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the
vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the
necessary data.
No satellite radio reception is available and
“NO SAT” is displayed when the SAT band
option is selected unless optional satellite
receiver and antenna are installed and a
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks
the satellite radio signal.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

Compact disc (CD) player

If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite antenna.

CAUTION

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can affect satellite radio performance. Remove the ice to restore satellite
radio reception.

∙ Do not force a compact disc into the
CD insert slot. This could damage the
CD and/or CD player.
∙ Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or
CD player.
∙ Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time.
∙ Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
∙ During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the
humidity. If this occurs, remove the
CD and dehumidify or ventilate the
player completely.
LHA0099

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

∙ The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
∙ The CD player sometimes cannot
function when the compartment
temperature is extremely high or low.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
∙ CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with fingerprints may not work properly.
∙ The following CDs may not work
properly:
∙ Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
∙ Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
∙ Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
∙ Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunction:
∙ 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
∙ CDs that are not round
∙ CDs with a paper label
∙ CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
∙ This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.

CHECK DISC

Compact disc with MP3 or WMA

∙ Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).

Terms

∙ Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
PRESS EJECT
This is an error due to excessive temperature inside the player. Remove
the CD by pressing the EJECT button.
After a short time, reinsert the CD.
The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal.
UNPLAYABLE
The file is unplayable in this audio
system (only MP3 or WMA (if so
equipped) CD).

∙ MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital
audio file format. This format allows for
near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction
of the size of normal audio files. MP3
conversion of an audio track from CDROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptible
loss
in
quality.
MP3
compression removes the redundant
and irrelevant parts of a sound signal
that the human ear doesn’t hear.
∙ WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is
a compressed audio format created by
Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The
WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the
same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality.

∙ If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

∙ Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number
of bits per second used by a digital music file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined
by the bit rate used when encoding the
file.

∙ The names of folders not containing
MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the
display.
∙ If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
∙ The playback order is the order in which
the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play
in the desired order.

∙ Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples
of a signal are converted from analog to
digital (A/D conversion) per second.
∙ Multisession — Multisession is one of
the methods for writing data to media.
Writing data once to the media is called
a single session, and writing more than
once is called a multisession.
∙ ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file
that contains information about the
digital music file such as song title, artist, encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed
on the Artist/song title line on the display.
* Windows® and Windows Media® are registered trademarks and trademarks in the
United States of America and other countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.

WHA1078

Playback order chart
Playback order
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or
WMA files is as illustrated.

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Specification chart
Supported media
Supported file systems

MP3
Supported
versions*1

WMA

Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate

Tag information
Folder levels
Text character number limitation
Displayable character codes*2

CD, CD-R, CD-RW
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
8 kHz - 48 kHz
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
32 kHz - 48 kHz
48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
128 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

Troubleshooting guide
Symptom

Cannot play

Poor sound quality
It takes a relatively long
time before the music
starts playing.
Music cuts off or skips
Skipping with high bit
rate files
Moves immediately to
the next song when playing
Songs do not play back
in the desired order

Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Bit rate may be too low.
If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music
starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not
match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright
protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

USB (Universal Serial Bus)
Connection Port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device. USB devices should be purchased
separately as necessary.
This system cannot be used to format USB
devices. To format a USB device, use a personal computer.
In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the
front seats plays only sound without images for regulatory reasons, even when the
vehicle is parked.
This system supports various USB
memory devices, USB hard drives and
iPod® players. Some USB devices may not
be supported by this system.
∙ Partitioned USB devices may not play
correctly.
∙ Some characters used in other languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may
not appear properly in the display. Using
English language characters with a USB
device is recommended.
General notes for USB use:
∙ For additional information, refer to your
device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care
of the device.

Notes for iPod®) use:
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may
cause a checkmark to be displayed on
and off (flickering). Always make sure
that the iPod® is connected properly.
∙ An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it
is connected during a seek operation. In
this case, please manually reset the
iPod®.
∙ An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will
continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is
disconnected during a seek operation.
∙ An incorrect song title may appear
when the Play Mode is changed while
using an iPod® nano (2nd Generation).
∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same
order as they appear on an iPod®.
∙ Large video files cause slow responses
in an iPod®. The vehicle center display
may momentarily black out, but will
soon recover.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

∙ If an iPod® automatically selects large
video files while in the shuffle mode, the
vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover.

Bluetooth® streaming audio
∙ Some Bluetooth® audio devices may
not be recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
∙ It is necessary to set up the wireless
connection between a compatible
Bluetooth® audio device and the invehicle Bluetooth® module before using
the Bluetooth® audio.
∙ Operating procedure of the Bluetooth®
audio will vary depending on the devices. Make sure how to operate your
audio device before using it with this
system.

∙ Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in an area surrounded by metal or
far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth®
module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.
∙ While an audio device is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the device
may discharge quicker than usual.
∙ This system supports the Bluetooth®
Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon.

∙ The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped
under the following conditions:
∙ Receiving a call on the Hands-Free
Phone System.
∙ Checking the connection to the
hands-free phone.

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

TRACK button

BACK button

9. iPod MENU button
10. ENTER/SETTING button / TUNE/FOLDER
knob
11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
12. RDM (random) button
13. RPT (repeat) button
14.

(power) button / VOL (volume)
control knob

15. DISP (display) button
16. MEDIA button
17. FM•AM button

Audio main operation
LHA4290

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)
For additional information, refer to “Audio
operation precautions” in this section.
1.

CD eject button

2. CD button
3. Display screen
4. CD insert slot
5.

SEEK button

(power) button / VOL (volume) control knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
(power) butposition and press the
ton while the system is off to call up the
mode (radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio,
USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately
before the system was turned off.

6. SCAN button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

To turn the system off, press the
(power) button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the volume.

This vehicle is equipped with Speed Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the
audio volume changes as the driving
speed changes.

ENTER/SETTING button
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show
the Settings screen on the display. Turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob to navigate the options and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button to make a selection.

Audio
Bass
Treble
Balance
Fade
Brightness
Contrast
Clock adjust
On-Screen Clock
RDS Display
Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume)
AUX Vol.
Language Select
Auto Source Change

Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right
speakers.
Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Adjust the brightness to adjust the appearance of the display screen.
Adjust the contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to highlight the hours or minutes and then use the TUNE/FOLDER
knob to adjust the value. Press the ENTER/SETTING button again to set the value.
Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.
Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.
Adjusts the Speed Sensitive Volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the
speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the
volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0
provides no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.
Select the desired language for the system from the available options.
Select ON or OFF for Auto Source Change. With Auto Source Change ON: when the device is plugged
into USB port, the radio will automatically switch to USB source. With Auto Source Change OFF: when
the device is plugged into the USB port, radio will stay on the currently selected source.

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/FOLDER knob to select
the item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING button
until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will
automatically reappear.

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

iPod MENU button
This button can only be used for iPod® operations. For additional information, refer to
“iPod® player operation (models without
navigation system)” in this section.
DISP (display) button
The DISP (display) button turns the display
screen on or off.

FM/AM radio operation
FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the
band as follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source
playing will automatically be turned off and
the last radio station played will begin playing.
TUNE/FOLDER knob tuning
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to the left or
right for manual tuning.

SEEK/TRACK tuning
Press the
SEEK button or
TRACK button to tune from low to high or
high to low frequencies and to stop at the
next broadcasting station.
SCAN tuning
Press the SCAN button to stop at each
broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN
will appear on the screen while the radio is
scan tuning.
Pressing the button again during this
5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and
the radio will remain tuned to that station. If
the SCAN button is not pressed within
5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Six stations can be set for the AM band.
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band
(6 for FM1, 6 for FM2).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button.
2. Tune to the desired station using
SEEK button or the
the
TRACK button. Press and hold any of
the desired station memory buttons (1

– 6) until the preset number is updated
on the display and the sound is briefly
muted.
3. The channel indicator will then come
on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player
operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins
to play.
MEDIA button
With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button
until the CD mode is displayed on the
screen.
CD/MP3 display mode
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain
text may be displayed on the screen if the
CD has been encoded with text information. Depending on how the MP3/WMA CD

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

is encoded, information such as Artist,
Song and Folder will be displayed.
The track number and the total number of
tracks in the current folder or on the current disc are displayed on the screen as
well.
SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or
Fast Forward) button
SEEK button
Press and hold the
or
TRACK button for 1.5 seconds while
the compact disc is playing to reverse or
fast forward the track being played. The
compact disc plays at an increased speed
while reversing or fast forwarding. When
the button is released, the compact disc
returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/TRACK button

on the disc is played. If the last track in a
folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the
first track of the next folder is played.

The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.

TUNE/FOLDER knob (MP3/WMA CD only)

RDM (random) button
When the RDM button is pressed while a
compact disc is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:

If an MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is
playing, turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to
skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right
to skip ahead a folder.
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT button is pressed while a
compact disc is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
CD:
1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:

SEEK button while a CD or
Press the
MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
SEEK button several times to skip
the
backward several tracks.
TRACK button while a CD or
Press the
MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one
TRACK button several
track. Press the
times to skip forward several tracks. If the
last track on a CD is skipped, the first track

1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be
repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CD:
1 Disc Random ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be
played randomly.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current
folder will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.

CD EJECT button
When the
CD eject button is pressed
with a compact disc loaded, the compact
disc will eject and the last source will be
played.
CD eject button is pressed
When the
twice with a compact disc loaded, the
compact disc will be ejected further for
easier CD removal. If the disc is not removed within 20 seconds, the disc will reload.

Additional features
For additional information about the iPod®
player available with this system, refer to
“iPod® player operation without Navigation
System” in this section.
For additional information about the USB
(Universal Serial Bus) connection port available with this system, refer to “USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port (models
without Navigation System)” in this section.
For additional information about the
Bluetooth® audio interface available with
this system, refer to “Bluetooth® streaming
audio without Navigation System (Type B)”
in this section.

LHA4300

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so
equipped)
For all operation precautions, refer to “Audio operation precautions” in this section.

CD eject button

2. XM button*
3. Display screen
4. CD insert slot

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

SEEK button

6. SCAN button
7.

CAT button

BACK button

9. iPod MENU button
10. ENTER/SETTING button / TUNE/SCROLL
knob
11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
12. RDM (random) button
13. RPT (repeat) button
14.

(power) button / VOL (volume)
control knob

15. DISP (display) button

*No satellite radio reception is available
when the XM button is pressed to access
satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed
and an SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service
subscription is active. Satellite radio is not
available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Audio main operation
(power) button / VOL (volume) control knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
(power) butposition and press the
ton while the system is off to call up the
mode (radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio,
USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately
before the system was turned off.

16. MEDIA button
17. FM•AM button

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

To turn the system off, press the
(power) button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed
Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.
ENTER/SETTING button
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show
the Settings screen on the display. Turn the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the options and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button to make a selection.

Audio
Bass
Treble
Balance
Fade
Brightness
Contrast
Clock adjust
On-Screen Clock
RDS Display
Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume)

AUX Vol.
Language Select

Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right
speakers.
Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear
speakers.
Adjust the brightness to adjust the appearance of the display screen.
Adjust the contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to highlight the hours or minutes and then use the TUNE/
SCROLL knob to adjust the value. Press the ENTER/SETTING button again to set the value.
Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.
Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.
Adjusts the Speed Sensitive Volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as
the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the
more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of
0 provides no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.
Select the desired language for the system from the available options.

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
the item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING button
until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will
automatically reappear.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the
band as follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source
playing will automatically be turned off and
the last radio station played will begin playing.
XM band select
Press the XM button to change the band as
follows:
XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → XM1 (satellite, if so
equipped)

When the XM button is pressed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,
the radio will come on at the station last
played.
The last station played will also come on
(power) button is pressed
when the
on.
*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite radio reception will not be available unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the XM
button is pressed, the compact disc will
automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will come on.
TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning)
Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or
right for manual tuning.
SEEK/CAT tuning
Press the
SEEK button or
CAT
button to tune from low to high or high to
low frequencies and to stop at the next
broadcasting station.

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SCAN (tuning) button
Press the SCAN button to stop at each
broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN
will illuminate in the display while scan tuning. Pressing the SCAN button again during
this 5 second period will stop the scan tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that
station. If the SCAN button is not pressed
within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to the
next station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Six stations can be set for the AM band.
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band
(6 for FM1, 6 for FM2). Eighteen channels can
be set for the satellite radio (6 for XM1, 6 for
XM2, 6 for XM3).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button, or
choose the satellite band XM1, XM2 or
XM3 using the XM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using
manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press
and hold any of the desired station
memory buttons (1 – 6) until the preset
number is updated on the display and
the sound is briefly muted.

3. The channel indicator will then come
on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player
operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins
to play.

The track number and the total number of
tracks in the current folder or on the current disc are displayed on the screen as
well.
SEEK/CAT (Reverse or
Fast Forward) button
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT button
or
for 1.5 seconds while the compact
disc is playing to reverse or fast forward the
track being played. The compact disc plays
at an increased speed while reversing or
fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc returns to normal
play speed.
SEEK/CAT button

CD/MP3 display mode
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain
text may be displayed on the screen if the
CD has been encoded with text information. Depending on how the MP3/WMA CD
is encoded, information such as Artist,
Song and Folder will be displayed.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only)
If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is
playing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to
skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right
to skip ahead a folder.
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT button is pressed while a
compact disc is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
CD:
1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF

MEDIA button
With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button
until the CD mode is displayed on the
screen.

track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is
played.

SEEK/CAT button while a
Press the
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press
SEEK/CAT button several times to
the
skip backward several tracks.
SEEK/CAT button while a
Press the
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance
SEEK/CAT button
one track. Press the
several times to skip forward several
tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped,
the first track on the disc is played. If the last

CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be
repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.

CD EJECT button

CD with MP3 or WMA:

When the
CD eject button is pressed
with a compact disc loaded, the compact
disc will eject and the last source will be
played.
CD eject button is pressed
When the
twice with a compact disc loaded, the
compact disc will be ejected further for
easier CD removal. If the disc is not removed within 20 seconds, the disc will reload.

1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF

Additional features

RDM (random) button
When the RDM button is pressed while a
compact disc is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
CD:
1 Disc Random ←→ OFF

1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be
played randomly.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current
folder will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.

For additional information about the iPod®
player available with this system, refer to
“iPod® player operation without Navigation
System” in this section.
For additional information about the USB
(Universal Serial Bus) connection port available with this system, refer to “USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port (models
without Navigation System)” in this section.
For additional information about the
Bluetooth® audio interface available with
this system, refer to “Bluetooth® streaming
audio without Navigation System (Type B)”
in this section.

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA3077

USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT (models
without Navigation System) (if so
equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB
Connection Port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

Audio file operation

∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB connection port. Inserting the
USB device tilted or up-side-down
into the port may damage the port.
Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB connection port.

MEDIA button
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the MEDIA button to
switch to the USB input mode. If a CD is
playing or another audio source is plugged
in through the AUX IN jack, the MEDIA button toggles between the three sources.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.

Play information

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
The USB port is located in the center console. Insert the USB device into the connection port.
When a compatible storage device is
plugged into the connection port, compatible audio files on the storage device can be
played through the vehicle’s audio system.

Information about the audio files being
played can be displayed on the display
screen of the vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the audio files are encoded, information such as Folder, Song
and Artist will be displayed.
The track number and number of total
tracks in the folder are displayed on the
screen as well.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
(Reverse or Fast Forward) buttons
or
SEEK/CAT
Press and hold the
and TRACK buttons for 1.5 seconds while an
audio file on the USB device is playing to
reverse or fast forward the track being
played. The track plays at an increased
speed while reversing or fast forwarding.

When the button is released, the audio file
returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
buttons
Press
the
SEEK/CAT
and
TRACK
buttons
while an audio file on the
USB device is playing to return to the beginning of the current track. Press the
sevSEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons
eral times to skip backward several tracks.
Press
the
SEEK/CAT
and
TRACK
buttons
while an audio file on the
USB device is playing to advance one track.
Press
the
SEEK/CAT
and
TRACK
several times to skip forward
buttons
several tracks. If the last track in a folder on
the USB device is skipped, the first track of
the next folder is played.
RDM (random) button
When the RDM button is pressed while an
audio file on the USB device is playing, the
play pattern can be changed as follows:
All Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
All Random: all tracks on the USB device will
be played randomly.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current
folder will be played randomly.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the USB device
is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied.
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT button is pressed while an
audio file on the USB device is playing, the
play pattern can be changed as follows:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF

TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL knob
If there are multiple folders with audio files
on the USB device, turn the TUNE/FOLDER
or TUNE/SCROLL knob to change folders.
Turn the knob to the left to skip back a
folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip
ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of
audio files on the USB device, turning the
TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will return to the first track on
the USB device.

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be
repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the USB device
is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied.

LHA3077

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB connection port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that
the iPod® can be controlled with the audio
system controls and display screen, use
the USB connection port located in the
center console. Connect the iPod®-specific
end of the cable to the iPod® and the USB
end of the cable to the USB connection
port. on the vehicle. If your iPod® supports
charging via a USB connection, its battery

will be charged while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or
ON position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®
can only be operated by the vehicle audio
controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,
remove the USB end of the cable from the
USB connection port. on the vehicle, then
remove the cable from the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility
The following models are compatible:

∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware
version 1.0.4 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware
version 1.0.2 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware
version 1.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch - 2nd generation (firmware
version 4.2.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch - 3rd generation (firmware
version 5.1 or later) (minimum iOS 5.0
required for smartphone integration)

∙ iPod® Classic - 5th Generation (firmware
version 1.3.0 or later)

∙ iPod® Touch - 4th generation (firmware
version 5.1 or later) (minimum iOS 5.0
required for smartphone integration)

∙ iPod® Classic - 6th Generation (firmware version 2.0.1 or later)

∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or
later)

∙ iPod® Classic - 7th Generation (firmware
version 2.0.4 or later)

∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or
later) (minimum iOS 5.0 required for
smartphone integration)

∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware
version 1.3.1 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)

∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)
(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphone integration)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphone integration)
∙ iPhone®5 (firmware version 5.1 or later)
(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphone integration)
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to the version indicated above.

Audio main operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Press the MEDIA button repeatedly to switch to the iPod® mode.
If the system has been turned off while the
iPod®
was
playing,
pressing
the
ENTER/SETTING or MENU button will start
the iPod®.
iPod MENU button
Press the iPod MENU button while the
iPod® is connected to show the iPod® operation menu on the audio display. Scroll
through the menu list using the
TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL control
dial. Press ENTER/SETTING button to select
a menu item. Items in the iPod® menu appear on the display in the following order:

∙ Playlists

REPEAT (RPT)

∙ Artists

When the RPT button is pressed while a
track is being played, the play pattern can
be changed as follows:

∙ Albums
∙ Songs
∙ Podcasts
∙ Genres
∙ Composers
∙ Audiobooks
∙ Shuffle songs
For additional information about each
item, refer to the iPod® Owner’s Manual.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons
SEEK or
CAT/TRACK
When the
button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds
while the iPod® is playing, the next track or
the beginning of the current track on the
iPod® will be played.
SEEK or
CAT/TRACK
When the
button is pressed for more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the iPod®
will play while fast forwarding or rewinding.
When the button is released, the iPod® will
return to the normal play speed.

∙ Now playing

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Repeat Off → 1 Track Repeat → All Repeat →
Repeat Off
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.
All Repeat: all songs in the current list are
repeated.
Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is applied.
RANDOM (RDM)
When the RDM button is pressed while a
track is being played, the play pattern can
be changed as follows:
Shuffle Off → Track Shuffle → Album Shuffle
→ Shuffle Off
Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list
will be played randomly.
Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list
will be played randomly.
Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is applied.

BACK button

4. The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate connecting from the phone handset. The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual.
You
can
also
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instructions on connecting NISSAN recommended cellular phones.

When the
BACK button is pressed, it
returns to the previous menu.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio
device that is capable of playing audio files,
the device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio system so that the audio files on
the device play through the vehicle’s
speakers. For additional information, refer
to “FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player” or “FM/AM/SAT radio with compact
disc (CD) player” in this section.

Audio main operation
LHA2775

Connecting Bluetooth® audio
To connect your Bluetooth® audio device
to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Select the “Bluetooth” key.

To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode,
press the MEDIA button repeatedly until the
Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the
screen.
The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are
displayed on the screen. Use the Preset 3
button for play and the Preset 4 button for
pause.

3. Select the “Add Phone or Device” key.
This same screen can be accessed to
remove, replace or select a different
Bluetooth® device.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

∙ A new disc may be rough on the inner
and outer edges. Remove the rough
edges by rubbing the inner and outer
edges with the side of a pen or pencil as
illustrated.

LHA0049

CD CARE AND CLEANING
∙ Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend
the disc. Never touch the surface of the
disc.
∙ Always place the discs in the storage
case when they are not being used.
∙ To clean a disc, wipe the surface from
the center to the outer edge using a
clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc
using a circular motion.
∙ Do not use a conventional record
cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use.

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA2266

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL
1. SOURCE switch
2.

Menu
switch/ENTER button

(back) switch

control

4. Volume control switch

SOURCE switch
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, push the SOURCE switch to turn
the audio system on.

Push the source select switch to change
the mode in the following sequence:
AM → FM1 → FM2 (if so equipped) → XM1 (if
so equipped) → XM2 (if so equipped) → XM3
(if so equipped) → SXM1 (if so equipped) →
SXM2 (if so equipped) → SXM3 (if so
equipped)→CD* → USB/iPod®* (if so
equipped) → Bluetooth® Audio* (if so
equipped) → AUX* → AM.
* These modes are only available when
compatible media storage is inserted into
the device or connected to the system.

Volume control switch
Push the volume control switch to increase
or decrease the volume.

Menu control
switch/ENTER
button
While the display is showing a map or audio
screen, tilt the Menu Control switch upward
or downward to select a station, track, CD
or folder. For most audio sources, tilting the
switch up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
provides a different function than a tilting
up/down for less than 1.5 seconds.

AM and FM:
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to seek up or down to the next station.
∙ Press the ENTER button to show the list
of preset stations.
XM/SXM:

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to increase or decrease the folder number (if playing compressed audio files).
∙ Press the ENTER button to show the CD
Menu.
USB:
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to increase or decrease the folder number.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to go to the next or previous channel.

∙ Press the ENTER button to show the
USB Menu.

∙ Press the ENTER button to show the
XM/SXM Menu.
iPod®:
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
∙ Press the ENTER button to show the
iPod Menu.

Bluetooth® Streaming Audio:
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
skip ahead or back to the next song.
∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to reverse or fast forward the current
song.
AUX:
∙ Press the ENTER button to show the
AUX Menu.

CD:
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

SIRI® EYES FREE (if so equipped)
(back) switch
Push the
(back) switch to return to
the previous screen or cancel the current
selection.

ANTENNA
The antenna pattern is printed inside the
rear window.

CAUTION
∙ Do not place metalized film near the
rear window glass or attach any metal
parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise
∙ When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window antenna.
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a
dampened soft cloth.

Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant
can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes
Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free
mode to reduce user distraction. In this
mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interaction by voice control. After connecting a
compatible Apple device by using
Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated
TALK switch on the steering
from the
wheel.
Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
∙ Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as
displaying pictures or opening apps,
may not be available while driving.
∙ For best results, always update your device to the latest software version.
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic
noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which
may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands correctly.
∙ For functions that can be used in Siri
Eyes Free, please refer to the Apple
website.

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REQUIREMENTS
Siri is only available on the iPhone® 4S or
later. Devices released before iPhone® 4S
are not supported by the Siri Eyes Free system. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for details about device compatibility.
Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please
check phone settings.
If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be
accessible from the lock screen. Please
check phone settings.
For best results, always update your device
to the latest software version.

Bluetooth® settings menu. For additional information, refer to “Changing
Siri Eyes Free Settings (models without
navigation system)” in this section.

OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE
1. Push or push and hold the
switch.

LHA2282

SIRI® ACTIVATION
Siri® Eyes Free function can be activated by
pushing
TALK switch on the steering
wheel.
1. Connect a Siri Eyes Free enabled
iPhone® to the vehicle. For additional
information, refer to “Initialization” in
this section.
2. After the Bluetooth® connection is established, the switch operation select
screen is displayed.
3. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” for
Siri Eyes Free activation Switch action
can also be changed from the

NOTE:
TALK

2. Speak your command and then listen
to the Siri® Eyes Free reply.
After starting Siri Eyes Free, push the
TALK switch again within 5 seconds of the
end of the Siri Eyes Free announcement to
extend the session.
Example 1 – Playing music
1. Push or push and hold the
switch.

If the audio track does not start playing
automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try
changing the track or audio source to resume playback.

TALK

2. Say “Play (artist name, song name,
etc.)”.
3. Your vehicle will automatically change
to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode*
when the music starts playing. Mode
selection is determined by the phone.
* If the iPhone® is also connected with the
USB cable.

For best results, use the native music
app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or
other 3rd party music apps may vary and
is controlled by the iPhone®.
Example 2 – Replying to text messages
1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected
and “Show Notifications” of the iPhone®
settings is enabled, the vehicle will display a notification for new incoming
text messages.
2. After reading the message, push or
TALK switch to
push and hold the
reply using Siri Eyes Free.
3. After a beep sounds, say “Text message” or a similar command to reply
using Siri Eyes Free.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

CHANGING SIRI® EYES FREE
SETTINGS
Settings for Siri® Eyes Free can be found in
the Bluetooth® settings menu. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this section.

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use
the
TUNE/FOLDER
or
TUNE/SCROLL
knob
to
select
“Bluetooth” and then press the
ENTER/SETTING button.

then press the ENTER/SETTING button.
4. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” using
the
TUNE/FOLDER
or
TUNE/SCROLL knob and then press
the ENTER/SETTING button.

3. Use
the
TUNE/FOLDER
or
TUNE/SCROLL knob to select “Siri” and

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom

Cannot access Siri Eyes
Free from switch on the
steering wheel

Audio Source does not
change automatically to
iPod® or Bluetooth® Audio mode
Play, pause, next track,
previous track or play
timer does not work

Cause and Countermeasure
Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.
Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.
Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.
Models without navigation system:
Check the settings for Siri Eyes Free activation on the vehicle audio system. If the setting is “Long Press”, you must push and hold
TALK switch on the steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds to start Siri Eyes Free. If the setting is “Short Press”, a short
the
push and release of the switch should start Siri Eyes Free.
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party
music apps may vary.
For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade
performance.
Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the
steering wheel.
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party
music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Symptom
Cannot hear any music/
audio being played back
from a connected
iPhone®
Cannot hear map turnby-turn direction guidance from a connected
iPhone®
Cannot receive text message notifications on the
vehicle audio system
Cannot reply to text
message notifications by
Siri Eyes Free

Cause and Countermeasure
Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.

Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.

Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My Car”.
Press the info button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.
After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Push or push and hold the
wheel for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.

TALK switch on the steering

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
When installing a CB, ham radio or car
phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe
the following precautions; otherwise, the
new equipment may adversely affect the
engine control system and other electronic
parts.

WARNING
∙ A cellular phone should not be used
for any purpose while driving so full
attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit
the use of cellular phones while
driving.
∙ If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode is highly
recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
CAUTION
∙ Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control
modules.
∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route
the antenna wire next to any harness.
∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave
ratio as recommended by the
manufacturer.
∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
∙ For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for servicing.

∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING
∙ Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to
use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the
engine.

with the in-vehicle phone module when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept
connections to other Bluetooth® devices; however some phones do not connect automatically to the system. For
additional information, refer to the
phone’s Owner’s Manual.
You can connect up to five different
Bluetooth® cellular phones to the invehicle phone module. However, you can
talk on only one cellular phone at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following notes.
LHA4287

Your NISSAN is equipped with the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If
you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled
cellular phone, you can set up the wireless
connection between your cellular phone
and the in-vehicle phone module. With
Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone
call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

∙ Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and
the in-vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system.

Once your cellular phone is connected to
the in-vehicle phone module, no other
phone connecting procedure is required.
Your phone is automatically connected

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular
phones may not be recognized or work
properly.
Please
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting instructions.
∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular
service area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal;
such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall
building or in a mountainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
∙ When the radio wave condition is not
ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it
may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.
∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an
area surrounded by metal or far away
from the in-vehicle phone module to
prevent tone quality degradation and
wireless connection disruption.

∙ While a cellular phone is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular
phone may discharge quicker than usual.
The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones.
∙ For additional information, please visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.
∙ Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference or a buzzing
noise to come from the audio system
speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate
the noise.
∙ For additional information, refer to the
cellular phone Owner’s Manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments
could damage the transmitter and may
violate FCC regulations.

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference
and
2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements
of
the
Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM
The system allows hands-free operation of
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands
may not be available so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.

Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. If the
button is pressed before the initialization
completes, the system will announce
“Hands-free phone system not ready” and
will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the
NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe
the following:
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises,
vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing voice
commands correctly.
∙ Wait until the tone sounds before
speaking a command. Otherwise, the
command will not be received properly.

∙ Start speaking a command within
5 seconds after the tone sounds.
∙ Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.

Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,
button located
press and release the
on the steering wheel. After the tone
sounds, speak a command.
The command given is picked up by the
microphone, and voice feedback is given
when the command is accepted.

∙ You can cancel a command when the
system is waiting for a response by saying, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces “Cancel” and ends the Voice
Recognition session. You can also press
button on the steerand hold the
ing wheel for 5 seconds at any time to
end the Voice Recognition session.
Whenever the Voice Recognition session is canceled, a double beep is
played to indicate you have exited the
system.

∙ If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again, say
“Help” and the system will repeat them.

∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the
voice feedback, push the volume control switches (+ or -) on the steering
wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio Volume
control knob.

∙ If a command is not recognized, the
system announces, “Command not
recognized. Please try again.” Make sure
the command is said exactly as
prompted by the system and repeat
the command in a clear voice.

Voice Prompt Interrupt
In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
button on the steering
pressing the
wheel. After interrupting the system, wait
for a beep before speaking your command.

∙ If you want to go back to the previous
command, you can say “Go back” or
“Correction” any time the system is
waiting for a response.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

If the operation of “Siri” is set
to “Short Press” on the
Bluetooth® setting menu,
pressing and holding
the
button initiates a
Voice Recognition session for
the Hands-Free Phone
operation. For additional
information, refer to
“Bluetooth® settings” in this
section.

One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak
the second level commands with the main
menu command on the main menu. For
button and after
example, press the
the tone say, “Call Redial”.

LHA4349

CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System are located on
the steering wheel.

PHONE/SEND
Press the
button to initiate a Voice Recognition session or answer an incoming
call.

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

You can also use
the
button to interrupt
the system feedback and give
a command at once. For additional information, refer to
“Voice Commands” and “During a call” in this section.
PHONE/END
While the voice recognition
system is active, press and
button for
hold the
5 seconds to quit the voice
recognition system at any
time.

Tuning switch
While using the voice recognition system, tilt the tuning
switch up or down to manually control the phone system.

CONNECTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If
the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be cancelled.
To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

LHA2257

LHA2274

2. Use
the
TUNE/FOLDER
or
TUNE/SCROLL
knob
to
select
“Bluetooth” and then press the
ENTER/SETTING button.

3. Use
the
TUNE/FOLDER
or
TUNE/SCROLL knob to select “Add
Phone or Device” and then press the
ENTER/SETTING button.
4. When a message with a PIN appears
on the screen, operate the Bluetooth®
phone to enter the PIN.
The connecting procedure varies according
to each phone. For additional information,
refer to the phone’s Owner’s Manual. You can
also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth or call the NISSAN
Consumer Affairs Department for instructions on connecting recommended cellular
phones.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

VOICE COMMANDS
Voice commands can be used to operate
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
button and say “Phone” to
Press the
bring up the phone command menu. The
available options are:
∙ Call
∙ Phonebook
∙ Recent Calls
∙ Messaging (if available)
∙ Show Applications (if available)
∙ Select Phone or Device

“Call”
For additional information, refer to “Making
a call” in this section.

“Phonebook”
The following commands are available under “Phonebook”:
∙ (a name)
Say a name in the phonebook to bring
up a list of options for that phonebook
entry. The system will say the name it
interpreted based on the voice command provided. If the name is incorrect,
say “Correction” to hear another name.
Once the correct phonebook entry is
identified, say “Dial” to dial the number
or “Send Text” to send a text message to
that number. Say “Record Name” to record a name for the phonebook entry.
Say “Delete Recording” to delete a recorded name for the phonebook entry.

∙ List Names
Speak this command to have the system list the names in the phonebook
one by one alphabetically. Say “Dial” to
dial the number of the current name or
“Send Text” to send a text message to
that number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move through the list alphabetically. Say “Record Name” to record a name for the current phonebook
entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a
recorded name for the current phonebook entry.
∙ Transfer Entry
This command can be used to transfer
multiple contacts at a time. To enable
manual contact transfer capability, set
“Phonebook Download” to “Off” in the
Setting menu. The ability to transfer
contacts via the OPP Bluetooth® profile
depends on your mobile phone. For additional information, refer to your
phone’s Owner’s Manual.
∙ Delete Entry
Speak this command to delete an entry
in the phonebook. Choose an entry to
delete by speaking the desired name or
say “List Names”.

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

“Recent Calls”
The following commands are available under “Recent Calls”:
∙ Incoming Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is
from an entry in the phonebook, the
name will be displayed. Otherwise, the
phone number of the incoming call will
be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send
Text” to send a text message to that
number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous
Entry” to move through the list of incoming calls.
∙ Missed Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is
from an entry in the phonebook, the
name will be displayed. Otherwise, the
phone number of the missed call will be
displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send
Text” to send a text message to that
number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous
Entry” to move through the list of
missed calls.

∙ Outgoing Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the
call was to an entry in the phonebook,
the name will be displayed. Otherwise,
the phone number of the outgoing call
will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send
Text” to send a text message to that
number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous
Entry” to move through the list of outgoing calls.
∙ Redial
Speak this command to call the last
number dialed.
∙ Call Back
Speak this command to call the number of the last incoming call to the vehicle.

“Messaging” (if so equipped)
Speak this command to access text messaging functions. For additional information, refer to “Text messaging” in this section.

“Select Phone”
Speak this command to select a phone to
use from a list of those phones connected
to the vehicle.

MAKING A CALL
To make a call from a phone connected to
the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System:
1. Press the
wheel.

button on the steering

2. The system will prompt you for a command. Say “Call”.
3. Select one of the available voice commands to continue:
∙ “(A Name)” — Speak the name of a
phonebook entry to place a call to that
entry. The system will respond with the
name it interpreted from your command and will prompt you to confirm
that the name is correct. Say “Yes” to
initiate the call or “No” to hear another
name from the phonebook.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

∙ “Phone Number” — Speak this command
to place a call by inputting numbers. For
7– to 10–digit phone number, speak the
numbers. Say “Correction” at any time in
the process to correct a misspoken or
misinterpreted number. For phone numbers with more digits or special characters, say “Special Number”, then speak the
digits. Up to 24 digits can be entered.
Available special characters are “start”,
“pound”, “plus”, and “pause”. When finished,
say “Dial” to initiate the call. Say “Correction” at any time in the process to correct
a misspoken or misinterpreted number
or character.

RECEIVING A CALL
When a call is received by the phone connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System, the call information is
displayed on either the vehicle information
display or both the vehicle information display and the control panel display.
Press the
Press the

button to accept the call.
button to reject the call.

DURING A CALL
While a call is active, press the
button
to access additional options. Speak one of
the following commands:

∙ “Redial” – Speak this command to dial
the number of the last outgoing call.
The system will display “Re-dialing
”. The name of the
phonebook entry will be displayed if it
available, otherwise the number being
re-dialed will be displayed.

∙ “Send” – Speak this command followed
by the digits to enter digits during the
phone call.

∙ “Call Back” – Speak this command to
dial the number of the last incoming
call. The system will display “Calling
back ”. The name of
the phonebook entry will be displayed if
it available, otherwise the number being called back will be displayed.

∙ “Transfer Call” – Speak this command to
transfer the call to the handset. To
transfer the call back from the handset
to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
button and
System, press the
confirm when prompted.

∙ “Mute On” or “Mute Off” – Speak the
command to mute or unmute the system.

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System allows for call
waiting functionality. If a call is received
while another call is already active, a message will be displayed on the screen. Press
button to hold the active call and
the
switch to the second call. Press the
button to reject the second call.
While the second call is active, pressing
the
button will allow the same commands that are available during any call as
well as two additional commands:
∙ “Switch Call” – Speak this command to
hold the second call and switch back to
the original call.
∙ “End Other Call” – Speak this command
to stay with the second call and end the
original call.
button to accept the call.
Press the
Press the
button to reject the call.

ENDING A CALL
To end an active call, press the
ton.

but-

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.
Check local regulations before using
this feature.
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of some of the applications and features, such as social networking and texting. Check local
regulations for any requirements.
∙ Use the text messaging feature after
stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use the feature
while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while using
the text messaging feature, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle.

NOTE:
Many phones may require special permission to enable text messaging. Check
the phone’s screen during Bluetooth®
pairing. For some phones, you may need
to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s
Bluetooth® menu for text messages to
appear on the headunit. For additional
information, refer to your phone’s Owner’s manual. Text message integration
requires that the phone support MAP
(Message Access Profile) for both receiving and sending text messages. Some
phones may not support all text messaging features. For additional information,
refer
to
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility information, as well as your device’s Owner’s manual.
The system allows for the sending and receiving of text messages through the vehicle interface.
Sending a text message:
1. Press the
wheel.

button on the steering

4. The system will provide a list of available commands in order to determine
the recipient of the text message.
Choose from the following:
∙ To (a name)
∙ Enter Number
∙ Missed Calls
∙ Incoming Calls
∙ Outgoing Calls
For additional information about these
options, refer to “Voice commands” in
this section.
5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send.
Nine predefined messages are available as well as three custom messages. To choose one of the predefined
messages, speak one of the following
after the tone:
∙ “Driving, can’t text”
∙ “Call me”
∙ “On my way”

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

∙ “Running late”

3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

∙ “Okay”

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

∙ “Yes”
∙ “No”
∙ “Where are you?”
∙ “When?”
∙ “Custom Messages”
To send one of the custom messages,
say “Custom Messages”. If more than
one custom message is stored, the
system will prompt for the number of
the desired custom message. For additional information on setting and
managing custom text messages, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this section.
Reading a received text message:
1. Press the
wheel.

button on the steering

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.

The text message, sender and delivery
time are shown on the screen. Use
tuning switch to scroll through all
the
text messages if more than one are availbutton to exit the text
able. Press the
message screen. Press the
button to
access the following options for replying to
the text message:

Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped)
If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,
it can also be used to create custom messages that are sent through the phone. For
additional information, refer to “Siri® Eyes
Free” in this section.

∙ Call Back
Speak this command to call the sender
of the text message using the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).

∙ Send Text
Speak this command to send a text
message response to the sender of the
text message.
∙ Read Text
Speak this command to read the text
message again.
∙ Previous Text
Speak this command to move to the
previous text message (if available).
∙ Next Text
Speak this command to move to the
next text message (if available).

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

NOTE:
For Apple iPhones, text messages can
only be sent through Siri.

∙ Delete Phone or Device
Select to delete a phone from the displayed list. The system will ask to confirm before deleting the phone.
∙ Replace Phone
Select to replace a phone from the displayed list. When a selection is made,
the system will ask to confirm before
proceeding. The recorded phonebook
for the phone being deleted will be
saved as long as the new phone’s
phonebook is the same as the old
phone’s phonebook.
LHA2894

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS
To access and adjust the settings for the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE
SCROLL knob to select “Bluetooth” and
then press the ENTER/SETTING button:
∙ Bluetooth
Select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® system on or off.
∙ Add Phone or Device
For additional information, refer to
“Connecting procedure” in this section.

∙ Select Phone
Select to connect to a previously connected phone from the displayed list.
∙ Show Incoming Calls
Select “Driver Only” to have incoming
call information displayed only in the
vehicle information display. Select
“Both” to have incoming call information
displayed in both the vehicle information display and the center display
screen.

∙ Text Message (if so equipped)
Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s text
messaging feature.
∙ New Text Sound (if so equipped)
Select to adjust the volume of the
sound that plays when a new text is
received by a phone connected to the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
The setting all the way to the left indicates that the new text sound will be
muted.
∙ Show Incoming Text (if so equipped)
Select “Driver Only” to have incoming
text messages displayed only in the vehicle information display. Select “Both”
to have incoming text messages displayed in both the vehicle information
display and the center display screen.
Select “None” to have no display of incoming text messages.

∙ Phonebook Download
Select to turn on or off the automatic
download of a connected phone’s
phonebook.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

∙ Edit Custom Messages (if so equipped)
Select to set a custom message that
will be available with the standard options when sending a text message. To
set a custom message, send a text
message to your own phone number
while the phone is connected to the
system. Three custom messages can
be set. Custom messages can only be
set while the vehicle is stationary.
∙ Auto Reply (if so equipped)
Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply
function. When enabled, the vehicle will
automatically send a predefined text
message to the sender when a text
message is received while driving.
∙ Auto Reply Message (if so equipped)
Select to choose the message that is
sent when the Auto Reply function is
enabled. Choose from “I’m Driving” or
one of the three custom messages
stored in the system.

∙ Vehicle Signature On/Off (if so
equipped)
Select to choose whether or not the
vehicle signature is added to outgoing
text messages from the vehicle. This
message cannot be changed or customized.

MANUAL CONTROL
While using the Voice Recognition system,
it is possible to select menu options by
using the steering wheel controls instead
of speaking voice commands. To activate
butmanual control mode, press the
ton on the steering wheel to access the
phone menu and then push either up or
tuning switch .
down on the
The manual control mode does not allow
dialing a phone number by digits. The user
may select an entry from the Phonebook
or Recent Calls lists. To reactivate Voice
Recognition, exit the manual control mode
button.
by pressing and holding the
At that time, pressing the
button will
start the Hands Free Phone System.

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MEMO

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . 5-10
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery
discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-14
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-22

BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . 5-25
BSW system limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . 5-32
RCTA system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
How to enable/disable the RCTA
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
RCTA system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Precautions on cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped) . . 5-43
ICC system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
The ICC switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
ICC system limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58

AEB system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Turning the AEB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
AEB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW). . . . 5-65
I-FCW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Turning the I-FCW system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . .5-68
I-FCW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . 5-83
Brake force distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
Hill start assist system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-86
Front and Rear Sonar System (if so equipped) . .5-86
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
How to enable/disable the sonar
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-89
Sonar limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-89
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Draining of coolant water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-92

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously
injured. Keep the car locked, with the
rear seatback and trunk lid securely
latched when not in use, and prevent
children’s access to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness
or death.

5-2 Starting and driving

∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all
windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.
∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
∙ Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length
of time.
∙ Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,
doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)
closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the
passenger compartment. If you must
drive with one of these open, follow
these precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
air recirculation but2. Set the
ton to off and the fan control dial to
high to circulate the air.
∙ If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer
through the seal on the trunk lid or the
body, follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon
monoxide entry into the vehicle.

∙ The exhaust system and body should
be inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering into the passenger
compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system,
underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system.
Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst
are burned at high temperatures to help
reduce pollutants.

WARNING
∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away
from
the
exhaust
system
components.

∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION
∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst’s ability
to help reduce exhaust pollutants.
∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep
driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other
unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.
∙ Do not race the engine while warming
it up.

∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to
start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check all your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is
the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.

Starting and driving 5-3

Additional information:
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
does not monitor the tire pressure of
the spare tire.
∙ The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above
16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may
not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a flat tire while driving).
∙ The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted on all four tires. After all four tires are inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must
be driven at speeds above 16 mph
(25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn
off the low tire pressure warning light.
Use a tire pressure gauge to check the
tire pressure.
∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears in the vehicle information
display when the low tire pressure
warning light is illuminated and low tire
pressure is detected. The “Tire Pressure
Low - Add Air” warning turns off when
the low tire pressure warning light turns
off.

5-4 Starting and driving

∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears each time the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position as
long as the low tire pressure warning
light remains illuminated.
∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending
on the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the outside temperature.
Do not reduce the tire pressure after
driving because the tire pressure rises
after driving. Low outside temperature
can lower the temperature of the air
inside the tire which can cause a lower
tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check the tire pressure for all four
tires.
∙ The Tire and Loading Information label
is located in the driver’s door opening.

∙ You can also check the tire pressure of
all tires (except the spare) on the vehicle
information display screen. The order of
the tire pressure figures displayed on
the screen corresponds with the actual
order of the tire position.
For additional information, refer to “Low tire
pressure warning light” in the “Instruments
and controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of
emergency” section and “Tire pressure” in
the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

∙ If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If you have a flat
tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon
as possible. (For additional information, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of
emergency” section for changing a
flat tire.)

∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, when a
spare tire is mounted or a wheel is
replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and
the low tire pressure warning light will
flash for approximately 1 minute. The
light will remain on after 1 minute. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the
TPMS and cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
∙ Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle.

∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or
a DC/AC converter is being used in or
near the vehicle.

∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

The low tire pressure warning light may
illuminate in the following cases:

CAUTION
Do not place metalized film or any
metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of
the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function
properly.

∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel
and tire without TPMS.
∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the
ID has not been registered.
∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by
NISSAN.

Starting and driving 5-5

FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:

visual and audible signals outside the vehicle to help you inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure.
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.

∙ The TPMS will not activate the EasyFill Tire Alert under the following conditions:

3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. Do not start the engine.

– If there is interference from an external device or transmitter.

Operation

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

1. Add air to the tire.

For Canada:

3. When the designated pressure is
reached, the horn beeps once and the
hazard indicators stop flashing.

This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert
When adding air to an under-inflated tire,
the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides

5-6 Starting and driving

∙ If the hazard indicator does not flash
within approximately 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is
not operating.

2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators will start flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire.
∙ If the tire is over-inflated more than
approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn
beeps and the hazard indicators
flash three times. To correct the pressure, push the core of the valve stem
on the tire briefly to release pressure.
When the pressure reaches the designated pressure, the horn beeps
once.

– The air pressure from the inflation
device is not sufficient to inflate the
tire.
– There is a malfunction in the TPMS
system.
– There is a malfunction in the horn or
hazard indicators.
– The identification code of the tire
pressure sensor is not registered to
the system.
– The battery of the tire pressure sensor is low.
∙ If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not operate due to TPMS interference, move
the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward
or forward and try again.

If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a
tire pressure gauge.

tem” section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted or improperly belted person
is significantly more likely to be injured
or killed than a person properly wearing
a seat belt.

WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss
of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times.
Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive
speed, high speed cornering, or sudden
steering maneuvers, because these driving
practices could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, loss of control could
result in a collision with other vehicles or
objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,
particularly if the loss of control causes
the vehicle to slide sideways.
Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving
when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which
may cause drowsiness). Always wear your
seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side
wheels may unintentionally leave the road
surface. If this occurs, maintain control of
the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only
a general guide. The vehicle must be driven
as appropriate based on the conditions of
the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the
vehicle to follow the road while vehicle

speed is reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle back onto the road
surface until vehicle speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn
the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all tires
are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving
lane.
∙ If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface
based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a
stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged
due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air
pressure loss can also be caused by driving
on under-inflated tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially
at highway speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by
maintaining the correct air pressure and
visually inspecting the tires for wear and
damage. For additional information, refer
to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

Starting and driving 5-7

section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses
air pressure or “blows-out” while driving,
maintain control of the vehicle by following
the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based
on the conditions of the vehicle, road and
traffic.

WARNING
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. Losing control of the vehicle may
cause a collision and result in personal
injury.
∙ The vehicle generally moves or pulls
in the direction of the flat tire.
∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe
location off the road and away from
traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers
and contact a roadside emergency
service to change the tire. For additional information, refer to “Changing a
flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream
reduces coordination, delays reaction
time and impairs judgement. Driving
after drinking alcohol increases the
likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident,
alcohol can increase the severity of the
injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the
influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of
people are injured or killed in alcohol-related
collisions. Although the local laws vary on
what is considered to be legally intoxicated,
the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the
effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!
That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,
prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t
drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is
impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other
physical condition.

5-8 Starting and driving

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
The ignition lock is designed so that the
ignition switch cannot be placed in the OFF
position until the shift lever is moved to the
P (Park) position.

WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will
stop when the ignition switch is pushed
three consecutive times in quick succession or the ignition switch is pushed
and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the
engine stops while the vehicle is being
driven, this could lead to a crash and
serious injury.

When the ignition switch cannot be placed
in the OFF position, proceed as follows:
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition
switch position will change to the ON
position.
LSD2014

When the ignition switch is pushed without
depressing the brake pedal, the ignition
switch will illuminate.
Push the ignition switch center:
∙ Once to change to ACC.
∙ Two times to change to ON.
∙ Three times to return to OFF.
The ignition switch will automatically return to the LOCK position when any door is
either opened or closed with the switch in
the OFF position.

3. Push the ignition switch again to the
OFF position.
The shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the ignition switch cannot be moved
from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed on the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

Starting and driving 5-9

one who does not carry the Intelligent Key,
to push the ignition switch to start the engine.
The operating range of the engine start
1 .
function is inside of the vehicle 䊊
∙ The luggage area is not included in the
operating range, but the Intelligent Key
may function.
∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed on the
instrument panel, inside the glove box,
storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not function.
LSD2020

OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within the
specified operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower and may not function
properly.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even some-

5-10 Starting and driving

∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed near the
door or window outside the vehicle, the
Intelligent Key may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
LOCK (Normal parking position)
The ignition switch can only be locked in
this position.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it
is pushed to the ACC position while carrying the Intelligent Key.
The ignition switch will lock when any door
is opened or closed with the ignition
switched off.

ACC (Accessories)
This position activates electrical accessories, such as the radio, when the engine is
not running.
ACC has a battery saver feature that will
place the ignition switch in the OFF position
after a period of time under the following
conditions:
∙ All doors are closed.
∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).
The battery saver feature will be canceled if
any of the following occur:
∙ Any door is opened.
∙ The shift lever is moved out of P (Park).
∙ The ignition switch changes position.
ON (Normal operating position)
This position turns on the ignition system
and electrical accessories.
ON has a battery saver feature that will
place the ignition switch in the OFF position, if the vehicle is not running, after some
time under the following conditions:
∙ All doors are closed.
∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).

The battery saver feature will be canceled if
any of the following occur:

∙ Push and hold the push-button ignition
switch for more than 2 seconds.

∙ Any door is opened.
∙ The shift lever is moved out of the P
(Park) position.
∙ The ignition switch changes position.

CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in ACC or ON positions when
the engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the
battery.
OFF
The ignition switch is in the OFF position
when the engine is turned off using the
ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on
the ignition switch.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency
situation while driving, perform the following procedure:
∙ Rapidly push the push-button ignition
switch three consecutive times in less
than 1.5 seconds, or

SSD0860

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key®
is discharged, or environmental conditions
interfere with the Intelligent Key operation,
start the engine according to the following
procedure:
1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will
sound.)

Starting and driving 5-11

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
After Step 3 is performed, when the
ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition
switch position will change to the ACC
position.
4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds
after the chime sounds. The engine will
start.
NOTE:
∙ When the ignition switch is pushed to
the ACC or ON position or the engine
is started by the above procedure, the
Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears in the vehicle information display even when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is
not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator, touch the ignition switch with
the Intelligent Key again.
∙ If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears, replace the
battery as soon as possible. For additional information, refer to “Battery
replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself ”
section of this manual.

5-12 Starting and driving

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM

∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of the registered key.

∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil,
coolant, brake fluid, and windshieldwasher fluid as frequently as possible,
or at least whenever you refuel.

If the engine fails to start using a registered
key (for example, when interference is
caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the
engine using the following procedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the
device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN
recommends placing the registered key on
a separate key ring to avoid interference
from other devices.

∙ Check that all windows and lights are
clean.
∙ Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for
proper inflation.
∙ Lock all doors.
∙ Position
seat
and
headrests/head restraints.

adjust

∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise.
∙ Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is pushed to
the ON position. For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator
lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The starter is designed not to operate if the shift lever is in any of the
driving positions.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. Depress the brake pedal and
push the ignition switch to start the
engine.
To start the engine immediately, push
and release the ignition switch while
depressing the brake pedal with the
ignition switch in any position.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator
pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the
floor) and while holding, crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal
when the engine starts.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it. Push the ignition switch
to the ON position to start cranking
the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop
cranking by pushing the ignition

switch to the LOCK position. After
cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine
with your foot off the accelerator
pedal by depressing the brake pedal
and pushing the ignition switch to
start the engine. If the engine starts,
but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine
does not start, push the ignition switch
to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds
before cranking again, otherwise the
starter could be damaged.
4. Warm-up:

5. To stop the engine, move the shift lever
to the P (Park) position and push the
ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not
running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly
and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.

Allow the engine to idle for at least
30 seconds after starting. Do not race
the engine while warming it up. Drive at
a moderate speed for a short distance
first, especially in cold weather. In cold
weather, keep the engine running for a
minimum of 2 to 3 minutes before
shutting it off. Starting and stopping
the engine over a short period of time
may make the vehicle more difficult to
start.

Starting and driving 5-13

DRIVING THE VEHICLE
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so
equipped)
Vehicles started with the Remote Engine
Start require the ignition switch to be
placed in the ON position before the shift
lever can be moved from the P (Park) position. To place the ignition switch in the ON
position, follow these steps:
1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on
you.
2. Apply the brake.
3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON
position.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT)
WARNING
∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), Ds (Drive
Sport) or manual shift mode (if so
equipped). Always depress the brake
pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose
control and have an accident.
∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward
or reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident
or damage the transmission.

5-14 Starting and driving

CAUTION
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in
the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.
∙ To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by
depressing the accelerator pedal. The
foot brake should be used for this
purpose.
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically
controlled to produce maximum power
and smooth operation.
The CVT can operate in two different automatic drive modes:
∙ D (Drive) mode - Move the shift lever to D
(Drive). The transmission is in the normal forward automatic driving mode.
The position indicator in the meter
shows a “D.”

∙ DS (Drive Sport) mode - Move the shift
lever from D (Drive) to Ds (Drive Sport).
The position indicator in the meter
shows a “Ds.” In DS (Drive Sport) mode,
transmission operation changes to
"Sporty” driving shift operation, creating
a more aggressive acceleration feeling
than the D (Drive) mode and a gear
change sensation when the driver accelerates or uses the paddle shifters (if
so equipped). During DS (Drive Sport)
mode operation, the driver must move
the shift lever from the Ds (Drive Sport)
position to the D (Drive) position and
back again to re-select DS (Drive Sport)
mode.
∙ To cancel the DS mode, return the shift
lever to the D (Drive) position. The transmission returns to the automatic drive
mode.
The CVT can operate in two manual drive
modes:
∙ M (Manual) mode (if so equipped) - With
the shift lever in the Ds (Drive Sport)
position, moving the paddle shifters up
(+) or down (–) produces noticeable upshifts and downshifts. The position indicator in the meter shows an “M.”

∙ To cancel DS (Drive Sport) mode return
the shift lever to the D (Drive) mode.
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.
NOTE:
Engine power may be automatically reduced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle
WARNING
∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), Ds (Drive
Sport) or manual shift mode (if so
equipped). Always depress the brake
pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose
control and have an accident.
∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward
or reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident
or damage the transmission.

CAUTION
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in
the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.
∙ To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by
depressing the accelerator pedal. The
foot brake should be used for this
purpose.
1. After starting the engine, fully depress
the foot brake pedal before moving the
shift lever out of the P (Park) position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
and move the shift lever into a driving
gear.

Starting and driving 5-15

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually
start the vehicle in motion.

WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever
is in any position while the engine is not
running. Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.

4. Stop the vehicle completely before
moving the shift lever to the P (Park)
position.
The Continuously Variable Transmission
is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST
be depressed before shifting from P
(Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

P (Park)

CAUTION

The shift lever cannot be moved out of P
(Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK position.

LSD2085

To move the shift lever:
A while depressing
Press the button 䊊
the brake pedal
A to shift
Press the button 䊊
A
Shift without pressing the button 䊊

Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the
brake pedal and move the shift lever from P
(Park) to any of the desired shift positions.

5-16 Starting and driving

To prevent transmission damage, use
the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only
when the vehicle is completely
stopped.
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when
the vehicle is parked or when starting the
engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped. The brake pedal should be depressed to move the shift lever from N
(Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).
Apply the parking brake. When parking on a
hill, apply the parking brake first, then move
the shift lever into the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse)

Ds (Drive Sport)

CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use
the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only
when the vehicle is completely
stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before selecting the R (Reverse)
position. The brake pedal must be depressed to move the shift lever from P
(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to
R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this
position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and
restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is
moving.
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward
driving.

When the shift lever is moved from the D
(Drive) to Ds (Drive Sport) position, the
transmission enters the DS (Drive Sport)
mode. Moving the shift lever to the Ds
(Drive Sport) position allows you to enjoy
“sporty” driving shift operation on a winding road and feel smooth acceleration or
deceleration on a hilly road by moving in a
lower gear automatically. When canceling
the DS mode, return the shift lever to the D
(Drive) position. The transmission returns
to the normal driving mode.
LSD2086

Manual shift mode (if so
equipped)
When the shift lever is in the Ds (Drive Sport)
position, the transmission is ready for the
manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be
selected manually by pulling the right-side
or left-side paddle shifter.
When shifting up, pull the right side paddle
C . The transmission shifts to the
shifter (+) 䊊
higher range.
When shifting down, pull the left side
B . The transmission
paddle shifter (⫺) 䊊
shifts to the lower range.

Starting and driving 5-17

When canceling the manual shift mode, return the shift lever to the D (Drive) position.
The transmission returns to the normal
driving mode. When you pull the paddle
shifter while in the D (Drive) position, the
transmission will shift to the upper or lower
range temporarily. The transmission will
automatically return to the D (Drive) position after a short period of time. If you want
to return to the D (Drive) position manually,
pull and hold the paddle shifter for about
1.5 seconds.

M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd)
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on
downhill grades.
M1 (1st)
Use this position when climbing steep hills
slowly or driving slowly through deep snow,
sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades.
∙ Remember not to drive at high speeds
for extended periods of time in lower
than 7 range. This reduces fuel
economy.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is
displayed on the position indicator in the
meter.

When shifting up

Shift ranges up or down one by one as
follows:

Move the shift lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts
to higher range.)

1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5 ⇔ 6 ⇔ 7

When shifting down

M7 (7th)

Move the shift lever to the ⫺ (down) side.
(Shifts to lower range.)

Use this position for all normal forward
driving at highway speeds.
M6 (6th) and M5 (5th)
Use this position when driving up long
slopes, or for engine braking when driving
down long slopes.

5-18 Starting and driving

∙ Moving the shift lever rapidly to the
same side twice will shift the ranges in
succession.
When canceling the manual shift mode
Return the shift lever to the D (Drive) position to return the transmission to the normal driving mode.

∙ In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected
gear. This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of
vehicle damage or loss of control.
∙ In the manual shift mode, the transmission may shift up automatically to
a higher range than selected if the
engine speed is too high. When the
vehicle speed decreases, the transmission automatically shifts down
and shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop.
∙ Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) operation is limited to automatic
drive mode when CVT fluid temperature is extremely low even if manual
shift mode is selected. This is not a malfunction. When CVT fluid warms up,
manual mode can be selected.
∙ When the CVT fluid temperature is high,
the shift range may upshift in lower
rpm than usual. This is not a malfunction.

To move the shift lever, complete the following procedure:
1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a
3 mm screwdriver, remove the shift
lock release cover.

WARNING
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position while the engine is
running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work.
Malfunctioning stop lights could cause
an accident injuring yourself and
others.

∙ If available, a plastic trim tool can also
be used.
LSD2087

Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged,
the shift lever may not be moved from the
P (Park) position even with the brake pedal
depressed and the shift lever button
pressed.
It will be necessary to jump start or have
your battery charged. For additional information, refer to “Jump starting” in the “In
case of emergency” section of this manual.
Contact a NISSAN dealer or a professional
towing service.

4. Insert the small screwdriver in the shift
lock release slot and push down.
5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position while holding down the shift
lock release.
If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P
(Park), have the transmission checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Starting and driving 5-19

To turn off the overdrive OFF mode, push
the O/D OFF mode switch again. The
indicator light will turn off.
Each time the engine is started, or when
the shift lever is shifted to any position
other than D (Drive) and Ds (Drive Sport), the
overdrive OFF mode will automatically turn
off.

Accelerator downshift
— in D (Drive) position —

Overdrive OFF mode

For passing or hill climbing, depress the
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts
the transmission down into a lower gear,
depending on the vehicle speed.

Overdrive (O/D) OFF mode switch
(if so equipped)

High fluid temperature protection
mode

When the O/D OFF mode switch is pushed
with the shift lever in the D (Drive) position,
light in the instrument panel illuthe
minates. For additional information, refer
to “Overdrive OFF indicator light” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
Use the overdrive OFF mode when you
need improved engine braking.

This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too high (for example,
when climbing steep grades in high temperatures with heavy loads, such as when
towing a trailer), engine power and, under
some conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the
chance of transmission damage. Vehicle
speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed
may be limited.

LSD2090

5-20 Starting and driving

Fail-safe
If the vehicle is driven under extreme
conditions, such as excessive wheel
spinning and subsequent hard braking,
the fail-safe system may be activated.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may come on to indicate the fail-safe
mode is activated. For additional information, refer to “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, place the
ignition switch in the OFF position and
wait for 10 seconds. Then push the
switch back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its
normal operating condition, have the
transmission checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.

PARKING BRAKE

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature protection mode or fail-safe operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower
than other traffic, which could increase
the chance of a collision. Be especially
careful when driving. If necessary, pull
to the side of the road at a safe place
and allow the transmission to return to
normal operation, or have it repaired if
necessary.

∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
∙ Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully
engaged.
LSD2177

1. To engage, firmly depress the foot
brake.
2. To release:
∙ Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position.
∙ Firmly depress the parking brake
pedal and it will release.

∙ Before driving, be sure the brake
warning light goes out.

Starting and driving 5-21

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so
equipped)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW
system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The BSW system is not a replacement
for proper driving procedures and is
not designed to prevent contact with
vehicles or objects. When changing
lanes, always use the side and rear
mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it
is safe to change lanes. Never rely
solely on the BSW system.
The BSW system helps alert the driver of
other vehicles in adjacent lanes when
changing lanes.

5-22 Starting and driving

LSD2475

The BSW system uses radar sensors 䊊
installed near the rear bumper to detect
other vehicles in an adjacent lane.
1

SSD1030

Detection zone
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on
either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of
your vehicle and extends approximately
10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and
approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
The BSW system operates above approximately 20 mph (32 km/h).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the
detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is
then activated, the system chimes (twice)
and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light
continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone.
The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient
light.

LSD2476

If a vehicle comes into the detection zone
after the driver activates the turn signal,
then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes and no chime sounds. For additional information, refer to “BSW driving
situations” in this section.

Starting and driving 5-23

The BSW system automatically turns on
every time the engine is started, as long as
it is activated using the settings menu on
the vehicle information display.

LSD2477

5-24 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
BSW SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the BSW system.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the ENTER button.

∙ When the BSW system is turned on,
the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the
vehicle information display illuminates.

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING

2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the ENTER button.

Listed below are the system limitations
for the BSW system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

3. Select “Blind Spot” and press the ENTER
button.

∙ The BSW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.

4. Use the ENTER button to turn the system on or off.

∙ The radar sensors may not be able to
detect and activate BSW when certain
objects are present such as:

NOTE:

– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.

∙ When enabling/disabling the system,
the system will retain current settings even if the engine is restarted.

– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low
height vehicles, or high ground
clearance vehicles.

∙ The RCTA system (if so equipped) is
integrated into the BSW system.
There is not a separate selection in
the vehicle information display for
the RCTA system. When the BSW is
disabled, the RCTA system is also disabled.

– Oncoming vehicles.
– Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when you accelerate
from a stop.

– A vehicle merging into an adjacent
lane at a speed approximately the
same as your vehicle.
– A vehicle approaching rapidly from
behind.
– A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly.
– A vehicle that passes through the
detection zone quickly.
– When overtaking several vehicles
in a row, the vehicles after the first
vehicle may not be detected if they
are traveling close together.
∙ The radar sensors’ detection zone is
designed based on a standard lane
width. When driving in a wider lane,
the radar sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors
may detect vehicles driving two lanes
away.
∙ The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects, however objects such as guardrails, walls,
foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition.

Starting and driving 5-25

Another vehicle approaching
from behind

∙ The following conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:

Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator
light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent
lane.

– Severe weather
– Road spray
– Ice/frost/dirt
vehicle

build-up

the

∙ Do not attach stickers (including
transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the
radar sensors. These conditions may
reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.
∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio
system volume, open vehicle window)
will interfere with the chime sound,
and it may not be heard.

LSD2299

Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS
Indicator
on
Indicator
off
Indicator
flashing

5-26 Starting and driving

∙ If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side indicator light will flash
but no chime will sound when the
other vehicle is detected.

LSD2300

Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the
turn signal when another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:

LSD2302

Illustration 3 – Overtaking another vehicle

Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 3: The side indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that
vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 2 seconds.

∙ The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly
from behind.

Starting and driving 5-27

∙ If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side indicator light will flash
but no chime will sound when the
other vehicle is detected.

LSD2303

Illustration 4 – Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 4: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
∙ When overtaking several vehicles in a
row, the vehicles after the first vehicle
may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
∙ The radar sensors may not detect
slower moving vehicles if they are
passed quickly.

5-28 Starting and driving

LSD2305

Illustration 5 – Entering from the side

Entering from the side
Illustration 5: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection
zone from either side.

∙ The radar sensors may not detect a
vehicle which is traveling at about the
same speed as your vehicle when it
enters the detection zone.

LSD2308

Illustration 6 – Entering from the side
Illustration 6: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
∙ If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side indicator light will flash
but no chime will sound when the
other vehicle is detected.

Starting and driving 5-29

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The
“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message
will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator
A in the vehicle informa(white) will blink 䊊
tion display.
The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as
ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system (if so equipped) will also
stop working.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.
LSD2478

5-30 Starting and driving

Malfunction

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply
additional paint near the radar sensors.

If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn
off automatically. The system malfunction
warning message with the BSW/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle information display.

Do not strike or damage the area around
the radar sensors. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around
the radar sensors is damaged due to a
collision.

NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system (if so equipped) will also
stop working.

Radio frequency statement

Action to take:

FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

For USA

LSD2475

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules.

1 for the BSW and
The two radar sensors 䊊
RCTA systems are located near the rear
bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.

Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the radar sensors.

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

Starting and driving 5-31

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)
(if so equipped)
For Canada

Bandes de fréquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz

Applicable law: Canada 310

Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts

This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts
Droit applicable: Canada 310
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

5-32 Starting and driving

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RCTA
could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The RCTA system is not a replacement
for proper driving procedures and is
not designed to prevent contact with
vehicles or objects. When backing out
of a parking space, always use the
side and rear mirrors and turn and
look in the direction your vehicle will
move. Never rely solely on the RCTA
system.
The RCTA system will assist you when
backing out from a parking space. When
the vehicle is in reverse, the system is designed to detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left of the vehicle. If the
system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION
The RCTA system can help alert the driver
of an approaching vehicle when the driver
is backing out of a parking space.
When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and
the vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is
operational.
If the radar detects an approaching vehicle
from either side, the system chimes (once)
and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes on the side the vehicle is approaching from.

LSD2476

Starting and driving 5-33

LSD2216

1
The RCTA system uses radar sensors 䊊
installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle.
1 can detect an apThe radar sensors 䊊
proaching vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft. (20 m) away.

5-34 Starting and driving

LSD2475

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
RCTA SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the RCTA system.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the ENTER button.
3. Select “Blind Spot” and press the ENTER
button.
4. Use the ENTER button to turn the system on or off.
When the RCTA system is turned on, the
BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle
information display illuminates.
NOTE:

LSD2477

∙ The RCTA system is integrated into
the BSW system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the RCTA system.
When the BSW is disabled, the RCTA
system is also disabled.

Starting and driving 5-35

∙ When enabling/disabling the system,
the system setting will be retained
even if the engine is restarted.

LSD2173

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

5-36 Starting and driving

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the RCTA system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
∙ Always check surroundings and turn
to check what is behind you before
backing up. The radar sensors detect
approaching (moving) vehicles. The
radar sensors cannot detect every
object such as:
– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,
animals or child-operated toy
vehicles
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
greater
than
approximately
19 mph (30 km/h)
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
lower than approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h)
∙ The radar sensors may not detect approaching
vehicles
in
certain
situations:

– Illustration b: When the vehicle is
parked in an angled parking space.
– Illustration c: When the vehicle is
parked on inclined ground.

∙ Excessive noise (e.g. audio system
volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it
may not be heard.

– Illustration d: When an approaching vehicle turns into your vehicle’s
parking lot aisle.
– Illustration e: When the angle
formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small.
∙ The following conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
– Severe weather
– Road spray
– Ice/frost/dirt
vehicle

build-up

the

– Illustration a: When a vehicle
parked next to you obstructs the
beam of the radar sensor.

Starting and driving 5-37

LSD2043

Illustration 1
NOTE:
In the case of several vehicles approaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime may
not be sounded by the RCTA system after the first vehicle passes the sensors.

5-38 Starting and driving

LSD2044

Illustration 2

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The
“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message
will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator
A will blink in the vehicle informa(white) 䊊
tion display.
The systems are not available until the
conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system will also stop working.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.

LSD2478

Starting and driving 5-39

Malfunction

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply
additional paint near the radar sensors.

When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will
turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the
BSW/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in
the vehicle information display.

Do not strike or damage the area around
the radar sensors. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around
the radar sensors is damaged due to a
collision.

NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system (if so equipped) will also
stop working.

Radio frequency statement

Action to take
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B

For USA

LSD2475

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules.

1 for the BSW and
The two radar sensors 䊊
RCTA systems are located near the rear
bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.

Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the radar sensors.

5-40 Starting and driving

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)
For Canada

Bandes de fréquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz

Applicable law: Canada 310

Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts

LSD2088

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
1. CANCEL switch
2. ACCEL/RES switch
3. COAST/SET switch
4. ON/OFF switch
∙ If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The
light in the instrument panel then blinks
to warn the driver.

Starting and driving 5-41

∙ If the
light blinks, turn the cruise
control switch off and have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
light may blink when the
∙ The
cruise control switch is turned ON while
pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or
CANCEL switch. To properly set the
cruise control system, use the following
procedures.

WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions:
∙ When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
in speed.
∙ On winding or hilly roads.
∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
∙ In very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed
between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
light in the
ON/OFF switch on. The
instrument panel will illuminate.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it. Take your
foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle
maintains the set speed.
∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed.
∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep
hills. If this happens, drive without the
cruise control.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods:
∙ Push the CANCEL switch.
∙ Tap the brake pedal.
∙ Push the ON/OFF switch off. The
light in the instrument panel goes out.

5-42 Starting and driving

The cruise control is automatically canceled if:
∙ You depress the brake pedal while
pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST
switch. The preset speed is deleted
from memory.
∙ The vehicle slows down more than
8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.
∙ You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the COAST/SET
switch.
∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the speed you
desire, release the switch.
∙ Push and release the ACCEL/RES
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed increases by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)
(if so equipped)
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the COAST/SET switch and release it.
∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle
slows to the desired speed.
∙ Push and release the COAST/SET
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed decreases by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and
release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle
returns to the last set cruising speed when
the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).
To turn off the cruise control, use one of
the following three methods:
∙ Push the CANCEL switch.
∙ Tap the brake pedal.
∙ Push the ON/OFF switch off. The
light in the instrument panel goes out.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ICC system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The ICC system is only an aid to assist
the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely and be in control of the vehicle
at all time.
∙ Always observe posted speed limits
and do not set the speed over them.
∙ Always drive carefully and attentively
when using the ICC system. Read and
understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the ICC system.
To avoid serious injury or death, do
not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle’s
speed in emergency situations. Do
not use the ICC system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.

LSD2479

The ICC system is intended to enhance the
operation of the vehicle when following a
vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction.
1
The ICC system uses a radar sensor 䊊
located on the front of the vehicle to detect
vehicles traveling ahead.

If the radar sensor detects a slower moving
vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the
vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows
the vehicle in front at the selected distance.
The detection range of the sensor is approximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.

Starting and driving 5-43

ICC SYSTEM OPERATION
The ICC system maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you within
the speed range 0 to 90 mph (0 to
144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set
speed can be selected by the driver between 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h), based
on road conditions.
The vehicle travels at the set speed when
the road ahead is clear.
The ICC system is designed to maintain a
selected distance from the vehicle in front
of you and can reduce the speed to match
a slower vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate the vehicle as necessary and if the
vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle
decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC
system can only apply up to 40% of the
vehicle’s total braking power.

LSD2998

5-44 Starting and driving

This system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or when vehicle
speeds change gradually. If a vehicle
moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a
vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates,
the distance between vehicles may become closer because the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough.
If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a

warning chime and blink the system display to notify the driver to take necessary
action.
For additional information, refer to “Approach warning” in this section.

must pay attention to vehicle operation to
maintain proper distance from vehicles
ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion.

The following items are controlled in the
ICC system:
∙ When there are no vehicles traveling
ahead, the ICC system maintains the
speed set by the driver. The set speed
range is between approximately 20 and
90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).
∙ When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,
the ICC system adjusts the speed to
maintain the distance, selected by the
driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle
decelerates to a standstill within the
limitations of the system. The system
will cancel once it judges a standstill
with a warning chime.
∙ When the vehicle traveling ahead has
moved out from its lane of travel, the
ICC system accelerates and maintains
vehicle speed up to the set speed.
The ICC system does not control vehicle
speed or warn you when you approach
stationary and slow moving vehicles. You

SSD0254

When driving on the freeway at a set speed
and approaching a slower traveling vehicle
ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed
to maintain the distance, selected by the
driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle
ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway,
the ICC system will accelerate and maintain the speed up to the set speed. Pay
attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates
to the set speed.
Normally when controlling the distance to
a vehicle ahead, this system automatically
accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead.

Starting and driving 5-45

Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brake
pedal when deceleration is required to
maintain a safe distance to the vehicle
ahead due to its sudden braking or if a
vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC system.

3. COAST/SET switch:
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces
speed incrementally.
4. CRUISE

switch:

Master switch to activate the system.
5. DISTANCE switch:
Changes the vehicle’s following distance:
∙ Long
∙ Middle
LSD2999

THE ICC SWITCH
The system is operated by the
CRUISE
switch and four control
switches, all mounted on the steering
wheel.
1. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed.
2. ACCEL/RES switch:
Resumes set speed or increases
speed incrementally.

5-46 Starting and driving

∙ Short

∙ ICC system warning (orange): Indicates that there is a malfunction in
the ICC system.
2. Set vehicle speed indicator:
Indicates the set vehicle speed.
For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.
3. Set distance indicator:
Displays the selected distance between vehicles set with the distance
switch.
LSD3000

The ICC system display and
indicators
The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer.
1. CRUISE

switch indicator:

∙ ICC system ON indicator (white): Inswitch
dicates that the CRUISE
is ON.

4. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:
Indicates whether it detects a vehicle
in front of you.

LSD3001

Operating ICC
To turn on the cruise control, quickly push
A .
and release the CRUISE
switch 䊊
The ICC system ON indicator (white), set
distance indicator and set vehicle speed
indicator come on in a standby state for
setting.

∙ ICC system SET indicator (green):
Indicates that the cruising speed is
set.

Starting and driving 5-47

∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
or Manual mode
∙ When the parking brake is applied
∙ When the brakes are operated by the
driver
When the COAST/SET switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system
cannot be set.
A warning chime will sound and a message
will pop up:

LSD3002

To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it. The ICC
system set indicator (green), vehicle ahead
detection indicator, set distance indicator
B will
and set vehicle speed indicator 䊊
come on. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set
speed.
When the COAST/SET switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system
cannot be set and the ICC indicators will
blink for approximately 2 seconds:
∙ When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h)
and a vehicle ahead is not detected

5-48 Starting and driving

∙ When the VDC system is off (To use the
ICC system, turn on the VDC system.
switch to turn off
Push the CRUISE
the ICC system and reset the ICC switch
switch
by pushing the CRUISE
again.)
For additional information about the
VDC system, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system” in this section.
∙ When ABS or VDC (including the TCS) is
operating
∙ When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC
system, make sure the wheels are no
longer
slipping.
Push
the
switch to turn off the ICC
CRUISE
system, and reset the ICC system by
switch again.)
pushing the CRUISE

LSD3003
1
䊊
2
䊊

System set display with vehicle ahead

System set display without vehicle
ahead
Vehicle detected ahead
When a vehicle is detected in the lane
ahead, the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling the throttle and applying the brakes to match the speed of a
slower vehicle ahead. The system then
controls the vehicle speed based on the
speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the
driver selected distance.

NOTE:
∙ The stoplights of the vehicle come on
when braking is performed by the ICC
system.
∙ When the brake operates, a noise may
be heard. This is not a malfunction.
When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on.
The ICC system will also display the set
speed and selected distance.
Vehicle ahead not detected
When a vehicle is no longer detected
ahead, the ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously
set vehicle speed. The ICC system then
maintains the set speed.
When a vehicle is no longer detected, the
vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.
If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to the set vehicle speed or any time the
ICC system is in operation, the system controls the distance to that vehicle.
When a vehicle is no longer detected under
approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the system will be canceled.

LSD2289

When passing another vehicle, the set
B will flash when the vespeed indicator 䊊
hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect indicator will turn off when the
area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to
the previously set speed.
Even though your vehicle speed is set in the
ICC system, you can depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate
your vehicle rapidly.

LSD3003
1
䊊
2
䊊

System set display with vehicle ahead
System set display without vehicle
ahead

How to change the set vehicle
speed
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following methods:
∙ Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.
∙ Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle
speed indicator will go out.

Starting and driving 5-49

∙ Turn the CRUISE
switch off. The ICC
indicators will go out.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use
one of the following methods:

∙ Push, then quickly release the
COAST/SET switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will decrease by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h for Canada).

∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the COAST/SET
switch.

To resume the preset speed, push and
release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle
will resume the last set cruising speed
when the vehicle speed is over 20 mph
(32 km/h).

∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
The set vehicle speed will increase by
approximately 5 mph (5 km/h for
Canada).
∙ Push, then quickly release the
ACCEL/RES switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will increase by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h for Canada).

LSD3004

How to change the set distance
to the vehicle ahead

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following methods:

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be
selected at any time depending on the traffic conditions.

∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the COAST/SET switch and release it.

A is
Each time the distance switch 䊊
pushed, the set distance will change to
long, middle, short and back to long again,
in that sequence.

∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.
The set vehicle speed will decrease by
approximately 5 mph (5 km/h for
Canada).

5-50 Starting and driving

Approach warning

NOTE:

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle
ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the driver with the chime and
ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if:

The approach warning chime may sound
and the system display may blink when
the ICC sensor detects objects on the
side of the vehicle or on the side of the
road. This may cause the ICC system to
decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The
ICC sensor may detect these objects
when the vehicle is driven on winding
roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when
entering or exiting a curve. In these
cases you will have to manually control
the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.

∙ The chime sounds.
∙ The vehicle ahead detection indicator
blinks.
LSD2778

Distance

Approximate distance at
60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]

Long

200 (60)

Middle

150 (45)

Short

90 (30)

∙ The distance to the vehicle ahead will
change according to the vehicle speed.
The higher the vehicle speed, the longer
the distance.
∙ If the engine is stopped, the set distance
becomes “long.” (Each time the engine
is started, the initial setting becomes
“long.”)

The warning chime may not sound in
some cases when there is a short distance
between vehicles. Some examples are:
∙ When the vehicles are traveling at the
same speed and the distance between
vehicles is not changing.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected
by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or
driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is
being driven with some damage).

∙ When the vehicle ahead is traveling
faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing.
∙ When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.
The warning chime will not sound when:
∙ The vehicle approaches other vehicles
that are parked or moving slowly.
∙ The accelerator pedal is depressed,
overriding the system.

Starting and driving 5-51

∙ As there is a performance limit to the
distance control function, never rely
solely on the ICC system. This system
does not correct careless, inattentive
or absentminded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or
other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake
pedal, depending on the distance to
the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.
SSD0252

ICC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the ICC system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The ICC system is primarily intended
for use on straight, dry, open roads
with light traffic. It is not advisable to
use the ICC system in city traffic or
congested areas.

5-52 Starting and driving

∙ The ICC system will not adapt automatically to road conditions. This system should be used in evenly flowing
traffic. Do not use the system on roads
with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in
heavy rain or in fog.

∙ If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop,
the vehicle decelerates to a standstill
within the limitations of the system.
The system will cancel once it judges
that the vehicle has come to a standstill and sound a warning chime. To
prevent the vehicle from moving, the
driver must depress the brake pedal.
∙ Always pay attention to the operation
of the vehicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance. The ICC system may not be able
to maintain the selected distance between vehicles (following distance) or
selected vehicle speed under some
circumstances.

∙ The system may not detect the vehicle in front of you in certain road or
weather conditions. To avoid accidents, never use the ICC system under
the following conditions:
– On roads where the traffic is heavy
or there are sharp curves
– On slippery road surfaces such as
on ice or snow, etc.
– During bad weather (rain, fog,
snow, etc.)
– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to
the bumper around the distance
sensor
– On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set vehicle speed and frequent braking
may result in overheating the
brakes)
– On repeated uphill and downhill
roads
– When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration

– Interference
sources.

other

radar

∙ Do not use the ICC system if you are
towing a trailer. The system may not
detect a vehicle ahead.
∙ In some road or traffic conditions, a
vehicle or object can unexpectedly
come into the sensor detection zone
and cause automatic braking. Always
stay alert and avoid using the ICC system where not recommended in this
warning section.
The radar sensor will not detect the following objects:
∙ Stationary and slow moving vehicles
∙ Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
∙ Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
∙ Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel
lane
The following are some conditions in which
the sensor cannot properly detect a vehicle ahead and the system may not operate properly:

∙ When excessively heavy baggage is
loaded in the rear seat or the trunk of
your vehicle.
The ICC system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s operation within
the limitations of the system.
The detection zone of the ICC sensor is
limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead.
A vehicle ahead may move outside of the
detection zone due to its position within
the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may
not be detected in the same lane ahead if
they are traveling offset from the centerline
of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the
lane ahead may not be detected until the
vehicle has completely moved into the
lane.
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn
you by blinking the system indicator and
sounding the chime. The driver may
have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling
ahead.

∙ When snow or road spray from traveling
vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.

Starting and driving 5-53

SSD0253

When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads
which are under construction, the ICC sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane,
or may temporarily not detect a vehicle
traveling ahead. This may cause the ICC
system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle.
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.)
or vehicle condition.

5-54 Starting and driving

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn
you by blinking the system indicator and
sounding the chime unexpectedly. You
will have to manually control the proper
distance away from the vehicle traveling
ahead.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
The following are conditions in which the
ICC system may be temporarily unavailable. In these instances, the ICC system
may not cancel and may not be able to
maintain the selected following distance
from the vehicle ahead.
Condition A
Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. A chime will
sound and the system will not be able to be
set:
∙ When the VDC system is turned off
∙ When the VDC or ABS operates
∙ When a vehicle ahead is not detected
and your vehicle is traveling below the
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)
∙ When the system judges the vehicle is
at a standstill
∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
or Manual mode
∙ When the parking brake is applied
∙ When a wheel slips
LSD2779

Starting and driving 5-55

Action to take
When the conditions listed above are no
longer present, turn the system off using
switch. Turn the ICC
the ICC CRUISE
system back on to use the system.
Condition B
When the radar sensor area of the front
bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the ICC system will automatically
be canceled. If the sensor area is covered
with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl
bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect
vehicles ahead. In these instances, the ICC
system may not cancel and may not be
able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to
check and clean the sensor area.
The system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the “Unavailable: Front Radar
Obstruction” warning message will appear
in the vehicle information display.
When driving on roads with limited road
structures or buildings (for example, or
long bridges, deserts, snow field, driving
next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light (orange) and
display the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” message.

5-56 Starting and driving

LSD2543

Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, park
the vehicle in a safe location and turn the
engine off. Check to see if the sensor area
of the front bumper is blocked. If the sensor
area of the front bumper is blocked, remove the blocking material. Restart the
engine. If the warning light continues to
illuminate, have the ICC system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Condition C
When the ICC system is not operating
properly, a chime sounds and the system
warning light (orange) will come on.

LSD2395

Action to take
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,
restart the engine, resume driving and set
the ICC system again.
If it is not possible to set the system or
the indicator stays on, it may indicate
that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, have the vehicle
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
near the sensor. This could cause failure
or malfunction.
∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the
sensor area (brush guard, etc.) This
could cause failure or malfunction.
∙ Do not alter, remove, or paint the front
bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement
LSD2479

FCC Notice

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

For USA

1 is located
The sensor for the ICC system 䊊
on the front of the vehicle.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules.

To keep the ICC system operating properly,
be sure to observe the following:

Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:

∙ Always keep the sensor area clean.
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensor. Do not touch or remove the screw located on the sensor.
Doing so could cause failure or malfunction . If the sensor is damaged due
to an accident, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer.

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference
in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own expense.
Radio frequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

Starting and driving 5-57

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING
(AEB)
This equipment should be installed and
operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body.
The transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
For Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.

5-58 Starting and driving

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the AEB
system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The AEB system is a supplemental aid
to the driver. It is not a replacement
for the driver’s attention to traffic
conditions or responsibility to drive
safely. It cannot prevent accidents
due to carelessness or dangerous
driving techniques.
∙ The AEB system does not function in
all driving, traffic, weather and road
conditions.
The AEB system can assist the driver when
there is a risk of a forward collision with the
vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.

LSD2479

1
The AEB system uses a radar sensor 䊊
located on the front of the vehicle to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in
the same lane.

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. AEB system warning light

AEB SYSTEM OPERATION
The AEB system will function when your
vehicle is driven at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected,
the AEB system will provide an initial warning to the driver by both a visual and audible alert.
If the driver applies the brakes quickly and
forcefully after the warning, and the AEB
system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward collision, the system will
automatically increase the braking force. If
the driver does not take action, the AEB
system issues the second visual warning
and audible warning and also applies partial braking.
If the risk of a collision becomes imminent,
the AEB system applies harder braking automatically.

LSD2706

Starting and driving 5-59

NOTE:
The vehicle’s brake lights come on when
braking is performed by the AEB system.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance
to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and
roadway conditions, the system may help
the driver avoid a forward collision or may
help mitigate the consequences of a collision, should one be unavoidable. If the
driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB system will
function later or will not function.
The automatic braking will cease under the
following conditions:
∙ When the steering wheel is turned as far
as necessary to avoid a collision.
∙ When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
∙ When there is no longer a vehicle detected ahead.
If the AEB system has stopped the vehicle,
the vehicle will remain at a standstill for
approximately 2 seconds before the
brakes are released.

LSD3005

5-60 Starting and driving

TURNING THE AEB SYSTEM
ON/OFF
Perform the following steps to turn the AEB
system ON or OFF.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Emergency Braking” and press
the ENTER button.
3. Select “System” and press the ENTER
button.
When the AEB system is turned off, the AEB
system warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
∙ The AEB system will be automatically
turned on when the engine is restarted.

∙ The I-FCW system (if so equipped) is
integrated into the AEB system There
is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the
I-FCW system. When the AEB is turned
off, the I-FCW system is also turned
off.

AEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the AEB system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The AEB system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
∙ The radar sensor does not detect the
following objects:
– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles
in the roadway.
– Oncoming vehicles.
– Crossing vehicles.

∙ The radar sensor has some performance limitations. If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicles’s path, the AEB
system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).
∙ The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle
ahead
in
the
following
conditions:
– Dirt, ice, snow or other material
covering the radar sensor.
– Interference
sources.

other

radar

– Snow or road spray from traveling
vehicles.
– If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g.
motorcycle).
– When driving on a steep downhill
slope or roads with sharp curves.
∙ In some road or traffic conditions, the
AEB system may unexpectedly apply
partial braking. When acceleration is
necessary, continue to depress the
accelerator pedal to override the
system.

Starting and driving 5-61

∙ Braking distances increase on slippery surfaces.
∙ The system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s functionality,
within certain limitations. The system
may not detect some forms of obstructions of the sensor area such as
ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases,
the system may not be able to worn
the driver properly. Be sure that you
check, clean and clear the sensor area
regularly.
∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime
may not be heard.

LSD2781

5-62 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
Condition A
When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it
impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the
AEB system is automatically turned off.
The AEB system warning light (orange) will
illuminate.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the AEB system will resume automatically.
Condition B
When the sensor area of the front bumper
is covered with dirt or is obstructed, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead,
the AEB system is automatically turned off.
The AEB system warning light (orange) will
illuminate and the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
When driving on roads with limited road
structures or buildings (for example, long
bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to
long walls), the system may illuminate the

system warning light (orange) and display
the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction”
message.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift
lever in the P (Park) position and turn the
engine off. Clean the radar cover on the
lower grille with a soft cloth, and restart the
engine. If the warning light continues to
illuminate, have the AEB system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the
AEB system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NOTE:
If the AEB system stops working, the
I-FCW system (if so equipped) will also
stop working.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the AEB system malfunctions, it will be
turned off automatically, a chime will
sound, the AEB warning light (orange) will
illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display.

Starting and driving 5-63

∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the
sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This
could cause failure or malfunction.
∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front
bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
FCC Notice
For USA
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules.
LSD2479

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 for the AEB is located on the
The sensor 䊊
front of the vehicle.

To keep the system operating properly, be
sure to observe the following:
∙ Always keep the sensor area of the front
bumper clean.
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensor.
∙ Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front bumper near
the sensor area. This could cause failure
or malfunction.

5-64 Starting and driving

Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference
in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own expense.
Radio frequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and
operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body.
The transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION
WARNING (I-FCW)
For Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I-FCW
system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The I-FCW system can help warn the
driver before a collision occurs but will
not avoid a collision. It is the driver’s
responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
The I-FCW system can help alert the driver
when there is a sudden braking of a second
vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle
ahead in the same lane.

LSD2479

1
The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor 䊊
located on the front of the vehicle to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in
the same lane.

Starting and driving 5-65

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. AEB system warning light

LSD2782

5-66 Starting and driving

LSD2263

I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATION
The I-FCW system operates at speeds
above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).
If there is a potential risk of a forward collision, the I-FCW system will warn the driver
by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator, and sounding an audible alert.

Starting and driving 5-67

TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEM
ON/OFF
Perform the following steps to turn the
I-FCW system ON or OFF.
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Emergency Braking” and press
the ENTER button.
3. Select “System” and press the ENTER
button.
When the I-FCW system is turned off, the
AEB system warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
∙ The I-FCW system will be automatically turned on when the engine is
restarted.

LSD3005

5-68 Starting and driving

∙ The I-FCW system (if so equipped) is
integrated into the AEB system. There
is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the
I-FCW system. When the AEB is turned
off, the I-FCW system is also turned
off.

LSD2312

Illustration A

I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

Starting and driving 5-69

LSD2265

Illustration B

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the I-FCW system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The I-FCW system cannot detect all
vehicles under all conditions.
∙ The radar sensor does not detect the
following objects:
– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles
in the roadway

5-70 Starting and driving

– Oncoming vehicles
– Crossing vehicles
∙ (Illustration A) The I-FCW system does
not function when a vehicle ahead is a
narrow vehicle, such as a motorcycle.
∙ The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle
ahead
in
the
following
conditions:
– Snow or heavy rain
– Dirt, ice, snow or other material
covering the radar sensor.

– Interference
sources.

other

radar

– Snow or road spray from travelling
vehicles.
– Driving in a tunnel
– (Illustration B) When the vehicle
ahead is being towed.
– (Illustration C) When the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too close,
the beam of the radar sensor is
obstructed.

– (Illustration D) When driving on a
steep downhill slope or roads with
sharp curves.
∙ The system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s functionality,
within certain limitations. The system
may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area such as
ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases,
the system may not be able to warn
the driver properly. Be sure that you
check, clean and clear the sensor area
regularly.
∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime
may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-71

LSD2266

Illustration C

5-72 Starting and driving

LSD2313

Illustration D

Starting and driving 5-73

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
Condition A
When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it
impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the
I-FCW system is automatically turned off.
The AEB system warning light (orange) will
illuminate.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the I-FCW system will resume automatically.
Condition B
When the sensor area of the front bumper
is covered with dirt or is obstructed, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead,
the I-FCW system is automatically turned
off.
The AEB system warning light (orange) will
illuminate and the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

LSD2781

5-74 Starting and driving

When driving on roads with limited road
structures or buildings (for example, long
bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to

long walls), the system may illuminate the
system warning light (orange) and display
the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction”
message.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift
lever in the P (Park) position and turn the
engine off. Clean the radar cover on the
lower grille with a soft cloth, and restart the
engine. If the warning light continues to
illuminate, have the I-FCW system checked.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
NOTE:
If the AEB system stops working, the
I-FCW system (if so equipped) will also
stop working.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will be
turned off automatically, a chime will
sound, the AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle
information display.

Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the
I-FCW system checked. It is recommended
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD2479

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 is located on the front of the
The sensor 䊊
vehicle.

Starting and driving 5-75

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the
sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This
could cause failure or malfunction.
∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front
bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
FCC Notice
For USA
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

5-76 Starting and driving

For Canada
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of
the device.

CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance
and ensure the future reliability and
economy of your new vehicle. Failure to
follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance.
∙ Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do
not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.
∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any
gear.
∙ Avoid quick starts.
∙ Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient
Driving Tips to help you achieve the most
fuel economy from your vehicle.

∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle
due to increased aerodynamic drag.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake
Pedal Application

∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin
when the A/C is on reduces cooling
load.

∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops.
∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possible.
∙ Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible.
2. Maintain Constant Speed
∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and
minimize stops.
∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic
lights allows you to reduce your number of stops.
∙ Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel
efficiency.
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher
Vehicle Speeds
∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to open windows to cool the
vehicle due to reduced engine load.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Distances
∙ Observing the speed limit and not
exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where
legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic
drag.
∙ Maintaining a safe following distance
behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking.
∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
changes in speed permits reduced
braking and smooth acceleration
changes.
∙ Select a gear range suitable to road
conditions.
5. Use Cruise Control

∙ Cruise control is particularly effective
in providing fuel savings when driving
on flat terrains.
6. Plan for the Shortest Route
∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to
determine the best route to save
time.
7. Avoid Idling
∙ Shutting off your engine when safe
for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds
saves fuel and reduces emissions.
8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads
∙ Automated passes permit drivers to
use special lanes to maintain cruising speed through the toll and avoid
stopping and starting.
9. Winter Warm Up
∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact
to fuel economy.
∙ Vehicles typically need no more than
30 seconds of idling at start-up to
effectively circulate the engine oil before driving.

∙ Using cruise control during highway
driving helps maintain a steady
speed.

Starting and driving 5-77

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly
while driving versus idling.
10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking
area or in the shade whenever possible.
∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening
the windows will help to reduce the
inside temperature faster, resulting in
reduced demand on your A/C system.

5-78 Starting and driving

∙ Keep your engine tuned up.
∙ Follow the recommended scheduled
maintenance.
∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure. Low tire pressure increases
tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
∙ Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
Improper alignment increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine
oil. For additional information, refer to
“Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this
manual.

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

WARNING
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
ignite and cause a fire.

∙ Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park). Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly or roll away and
result in an accident. Make sure the
shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be
moved without depressing the foot
brake pedal.
∙ Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling
into traffic when parked on an incline, it
is a good practice to turn the wheels as
illustrated.
A :
∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and
move the vehicle forward until the curb
side wheel gently touches the curb.
B:
∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb
and move the vehicle back until the
curb side wheel gently touches the
curb.

Starting and driving 5-79

POWER STEERING
∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
C :
CURB 䊊
Turn the wheels toward the side of the
road so the vehicle will move away
from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.

WARNING
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work.
Steering will be harder to operate.
∙ When the power steering warning
light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for
the steering. You will still have control
of the vehicle, but the steering will be
much harder to operate. Have the
power steering system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
The power steering system is designed to
provide power assistance while driving to
operate the steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or continuously while parking or
driving at a very low speed, the power assist for the steering wheel will be reduced.
This is to prevent overheating of the power
steering system and protect it from getting
damaged. While the power assist is reduced, steering wheel operation will become heavy. If the steering wheel operation is still performed, the power steering
may stop and the power steering warning
light will illuminate. In a safe location, stop

5-80 Starting and driving

the engine and place the ignition switch in
the OFF position. The temperature of the
power steering system will go down after a
period of time and the power assist level
will return to normal after starting the engine. The power steering warning light will
go off. Avoid repeating such steering wheel
operations that could cause the power
steering system to overheat.
You may hear a noise from the front of the
vehicle when the steering wheel is operated. This is a normal operational noise
and is not a malfunction.
If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the power steering system is not
functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the power steering system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, the
power assist for the steering will cease operation but you will still have control of the
vehicle. At this time, greater steering efforts
are required to operate the steering wheel,
especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.

BRAKE SYSTEM
The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,
you will still have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using
engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you
can stop the vehicle by depressing the
brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to
stop the vehicle and stopping distance will
be longer.

Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal
while driving. This will overheat the brakes,
wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce
gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent
the brakes from overheating, reduce speed
and downshift to a lower gear before going
down a slope or long grade. Overheated
brakes may reduce braking performance
and could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING
∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to
skid and result in an accident.
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven
through water, the brakes may get wet. As
a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side
during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until
the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving
the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes
function correctly.

Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever
the stopping effect of the parking brake is
weakened or whenever the parking brake

shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,
in order to assure the best braking performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle
service manual. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
WARNING
∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but
it cannot prevent accidents resulting
from careless or dangerous driving
techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces
will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
are using tire chains. Always maintain
a safe distance from the vehicle in
front of you. Ultimately, the driver is
responsible for safety.
∙ Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness.

Starting and driving 5-81

– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and
type as specified on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to “Tire
and Loading Information label” in
the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
– For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-ityourself ” section of this manual.
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels
do not lock during hard braking or when
braking on slippery surfaces. The system
detects the rotation speed at each wheel
and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding.
By preventing each wheel from locking, the
system helps the driver maintain steering
control and helps to minimize swerving
and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The

5-82 Starting and driving

Anti-lock Braking System will operate to
prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.

Self-test feature
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) includes electronic sensors, electric pumps,
hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start
the engine and move the vehicle at a low
speed in forward or reverse. When the selftest occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise
and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.
This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the
instrument panel. The brake system then
operates normally but without anti-lock
assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during
the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) operates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 10 km/h). The speed varies according to
road conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more
wheels are close to locking up, the actuator
rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the
brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise
from under the hood or feel a vibration
from the actuator when it is operating. This
is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation
may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while
driving.

BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal
exceeds a certain level, the brake assist is
activated generating greater braking force
than a conventional brake booster even
with light pedal force.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
WARNING
The brake assist is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely and be in control of the vehicle at
all times.

The VDC system uses various sensors to
monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.
Under certain driving conditions, the VDC
system helps to perform the following
functions:
∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce
wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel
so power is transferred to a nonslipping drive wheel on the same axle.
∙ Controls brake pressure and engine
output to reduce drive wheel slip based
on vehicle speed (traction control function).
∙ Controls brake pressure at individual
wheels and engine output to help the
driver maintain control of the vehicle in
the following conditions:
– Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input)
– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due
to certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to
maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the
indicator in the instrument panel flashes to
note the following:
∙ The road may be slippery or the system
may determine some action is required
to help keep the vehicle on the steered
path.
∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise or vibration from
under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working
properly.
∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the
road conditions.
For additional information, refer to “Slip indicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
If a malfunction occurs in the system,
indicator light comes on in the
the
instrument panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when the indicator light
is on.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the
indicator and the
VDC system. The
AEB system warning light illuminate to indicate the VDC system is off.

Starting and driving 5-83

When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off
the system, the VDC system still operates
to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by
transferring power to a non-slipping drive
indicator flashes if this ocwheel. The
curs. All other VDC functions are off and
indicator will not flash.
the
The VDC system is automatically reset to
ON when the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position then back to the ON position.
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you
start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When
the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk
noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.

5-84 Starting and driving

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
the VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and
indicator may flash or
the
the
indicator
light
may
illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and both
and
indicator lights
the
may illuminate.
∙ If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, both the
and the
indicator lights may
illuminate.

∙ When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate
indicator may
properly and the
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate. Do not drive on these types
of roads.
∙ When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
indicator may flash or
ramp, the
the
indicator light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a
stable surface.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the VDC system may not operate
indicator may
properly and the
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns,
the system optimizes the distribution of
force to each of the front and rear wheels
depending on the radius of the turn.

WARNING
∙ The VDC system is designed to help
the driver maintain stability but does
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or
by careless or dangerous driving
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and
be especially careful when driving and
cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
the VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and
indicator may flash or
the
the
indicator
light
may
illuminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and both
and
indicator light
the
may illuminate.
∙ If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, both the
and the
indicator light may
illuminate.

∙ If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the VDC system may not operate
indicator may
properly and the
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.

Starting and driving 5-85

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

WARNING
∙ Never rely solely on the hill start assist
system to prevent the vehicle from
moving backward on a hill. Always
drive carefully and attentively. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be especially careful when stopped on a hill
on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to
prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may result in a loss of control of
the vehicle and possible serious injury
or death.
∙ The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill. Depress the brake pedal
when the vehicle is stopped on a
steep hill. Failure to do so may cause
the vehicle to roll backwards and may
result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
∙ The hill start assist system may not
prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill under all load or road
conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the
vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure to do so may result in a collision or
serious personal injury.

5-86 Starting and driving

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill
start assist system automatically keeps
the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle from rolling backward in the time it
takes the driver to release the brake pedal
and apply the accelerator.
The hill start assist system will operate automatically under the following conditions:
∙ The transmission is shifted to a forward
or reverse gear.
∙ The vehicle is stopped completely on a
hill by applying the brake. The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After
2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll
back and the hill start assist system will
stop operating completely.
The hill start assist system will not operate
when the shift lever is placed in the N (Neutral) or P (Park) position or on a flat and level
road.

LSD2135

The sonar (parking sensor) system sounds
a tone to inform the driver of obstacles
near the bumper.
When the “DISPLAY” key is on, the sonar
view will automatically appear in the meter.

WARNING
∙ The sonar (parking sensor) system is
a convenience but it is not a substitute
for proper parking.

∙ The driver is always responsible for
safety during parking and other maneuvers. Always look around and
check that it is safe to do so before
parking.
∙ Read and understand the limitations
of the sonar (parking sensor) system
as contained in this section. The colors of the corner sonar indicator and
the distance guide lines in the
front/rear view indicate different distances to the object.
∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonic
sources such as an automatic car
wash, a truck’s compressed-air
brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect
the function of the system; this may
include reduced performance or a
false activation.
∙ This function is designed as an aid to
the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging
the vehicle.

∙ The system is not designed to prevent
contact with small or moving objects.
Always move slowly. The system will
not detect small objects below the
bumper, and may not detect objects
close to the bumper or on the ground.
∙ The system may not detect the following objects: fluffy objects such as
snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.;
thin objects such as rope, wire and
chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.

CAUTION
∙ Excessive noise (such as audio system
volume or an open vehicle window)
will interfere with the tone and it may
not be heard.

∙ Keep the sonar sensors (located on
the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt. Do
not clean the sensors with sharp objects. If the sensors are covered, the
accuracy of the sonar function will be
diminished.

SYSTEM OPERATION
The system informs with a visual and audible alert of front obstacles when the shift
lever is in the D (Drive) position and both
front and rear obstacles when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
Sonar Operation Table
FR Sensor

RR Sensor

Range

Sound

Display

Sound

†

Display
†

†

o – Display/Beep when detect
† – Display on camera view
x – No Display and Beep

The system is deactivated at speeds above
6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
speeds.

Starting and driving 5-87

The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when an obstacle is detected by only
the corner sensor and the distance does
not change. The tone will stop when the
obstacle gets away from the vehicle.
When the object is detected, the indicator
(green) appears and blinks and the tone
sounds intermittently. When the vehicle
moves closer to the object, the color of the
indicator turns yellow and the rate of the
blinking increases. When the vehicle is very
close to the object, the indicator stops
blinking and turns red, and the tone
sounds continuously.
LSD2815

When the corner of the vehicle moves
closer to an object, the corner sonar indiA appears.
cator 䊊

5-88 Starting and driving

LSD2137

A will appear when
The system indicators 䊊
the vehicle moves closer to an object.

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
SONAR SYSTEM
The system is automatically activated
when the ignition is in the ON position and
the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the sonar system:
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the ENTER button.
3. Select “Sensor” and press the ENTER
button.

SONAR LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the sonar system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
LSD2490

Starting and driving 5-89

∙ Read and understand the limitations
of the sonar system as contained in
this section. Inclement weather may
affect the function of the sonar system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
∙ The system is deactivated at speeds
above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonic
sources such as an automatic car
wash, a truck’s compressed-air
brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect
the function of the system; this may
include reduced performance or a
false activation.
∙ The system is not designed to prevent
contact with small or moving objects.
Always move slowly. The system will
not detect small objects below the
bumper or on the ground.
∙ The system may not detect the following objects: fluffy objects such as
snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.;
thin objects such as rope, wire and
chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.

∙ The system may not detect objects at
speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and
may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When sonar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically.
The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as
ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.

LSD2135

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sonar sensors are located on the front
and rear bumpers. Always keep the area
near the sonar sensors clean.
The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the sonar sensors.

5-90 Starting and driving

COLD WEATHER DRIVING
Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply
additional paint near the sonar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around
the sonar sensors. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around
the sonar sensors is damaged due to a
collision.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply
de-icer through the key hole. If the lock
becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry function on the Intelligent Key.

If the vehicle is to be left outside without
anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Changing engine coolant” in
the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

ANTIFREEZE

TIRE EQUIPMENT

In the winter when it is anticipated that the
temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),
check the antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information,
refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Doit-yourself ” section of this manual.

BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during
extremely cold weather conditions, the
battery fluid may freeze and damage the
battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,
the battery should be checked regularly.
For additional information, refer to “Battery”
in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry
pavement. However, the performance
of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If
you operate your vehicle on snowy or
icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use
of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES
on all four wheels. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire
type, size, speed rating and availability
information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads,
studded tires may be used. However,
some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local,
state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.

Starting and driving 5-91

Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional
information, refer to “Tire chains” in the
“Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items
be carried in the vehicle during winter:
∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows
and wiper blades.
∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under
the jack to give it firm support.
∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
∙ Extra washer fluid to refill
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

5-92 Starting and driving

the

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted
or sanded.
∙ Whatever the condition, drive with
caution. Accelerate and slow down
with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will
lose even more traction.
∙ Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
∙ Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch
of ice is seen ahead, brake before
reaching it. Try not to brake while on
the ice, and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.

∙ Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads.
∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
Engine block heaters are used to assist
with cold temperature starting.
The engine block heater should be used
when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C)
or lower.

WARNING
∙ Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical system
or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be
seriously injured by an electrical
shock if you use an ungrounded
connection.
∙ Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting
the engine. Damage to the cord could
result in an electrical shock and can
cause serious injury.

∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged
extension cord rated for at least 10 A.
Plug the extension cord into a Ground
Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,
grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to
use the proper extension cord or a
grounded outlet can result in a fire or
electrical shock and cause serious
personal injury.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and
properly store the cord to keep it away
from moving parts.

To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine
block heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into
a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground
Fault
Interrupt
(GFI)
protected,
grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be
plugged in for at least 2–4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to
properly warm the engine coolant. Use
an appropriate timer to turn the engine
block heater on.

Starting and driving 5-93

MEMO

5-94 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
First aid kit (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck
vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

FIRST AID KIT (if so equipped)

∙ Turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning flasher lights are on.
The flashers will operate with the ignition
switch placed in any position.
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use
of the hazard warning flasher switch
while driving.

LIC0394

LCE2131

Push the switch on to warn other drivers
when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

A first aid kit is located in the trunk. To remove the first aid kit:

WARNING
∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure
to move the vehicle well off the road.
∙ Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you
to drive so slowly that your vehicle
might become a hazard to other
traffic.

6-2 In case of emergency

Open the trunk. Lift the luggage floor. The
1 is located in the storage
first aid kit 䊊
2 .
cover 䊊

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

FLAT TIRE

To shut off the engine in an emergency
situation while driving, perform the following procedure:

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition
switch three consecutive times in less
than 1.5 seconds, or
– Push and hold the push-button ignition
switch for more than 2 seconds.

This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the
spare. When the low tire pressure warning
light is lit, and the “Tire Pressure Low - Add
Air” warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. If equipped, the
system also displays pressure of all tires
(except the spare tire) on the display screen
by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS
will activate and warn you of it by the low
tire pressure warning light. This system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional information, refer to “Warning lights,
indicator lights and audible reminders” in
the “Instruments and controls” section and
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
∙ If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a
flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as
soon as possible.

In case of emergency 6-3

∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, TPMS will
not function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approximately one minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as
soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
these services.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
below:

Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the
parking brake. Move the shift lever to P
(Park).

6-4 In case of emergency

4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic
and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away
from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING
∙ Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT) is shifted
into P (Park).
∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic
is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

LCE2142

Blocks

Flat tire

Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the
flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving
when it is jacked up.

WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.

LCE2046

Type A (if so equipped)

LCE2303

Type B (if so equipped)

LCE2379

Type C (if so equipped)

Getting the spare tire and tools
Open the trunk. Lift the luggage floor. Re1 and the
move the wheel nut wrench 䊊
2 from the storage cover 䊊
3 . Then
jack 䊊
3 to access
remove the tool storage cover 䊊
the spare tire.

In case of emergency 6-5

WCE0067

Type A (if so equipped)
Turn the clamp to remove the spare tire.
Remove the spare tire.

LCE0075

Type B (if so equipped)

SCE0630

Removing wheel cover (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could
result in personal injury.
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod
1 as illustrated.
䊊
2 between the wheel and jack
Apply cloth 䊊
rod to prevent damaging the wheel and
wheel cover.

6-6 In case of emergency

Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover
or wheel surface.

∙ Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use
the jack provided with your vehicle on
other vehicles. The jack is designed
for lifting only your vehicle during a
tire change.
∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for
jack support.
∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.
WCE0160

Jack-up point

Jacking up vehicle and removing
the damaged tire
WARNING
∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.

∙ Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for vehicles with limited slip
differentials.
∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s)
off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move.

In case of emergency 6-7

LCE0020

Always refer to the illustration for the correct placement and jack-up points for your
specific vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached
to the jack body and the following instructions.
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two
turns by turning counterclockwise with
the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove
the wheel nuts until the tire is off the
ground.
2. Place the jack directly under the
jack-up point as illustrated so the top
of the jack contacts the vehicle at the

6-8 In case of emergency

jack-up point. Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or
the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of
the jack head between the notches as
shown.
The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack
lever and rod with both hands. Carefully
raise the vehicle until the tire clears the
ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and
then remove the tire.

WCE0056

Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and
tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten
wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the
A ,䊊
B,䊊
C ,䊊
D,䊊
E )
sequence illustrated (䊊
until they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the
wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel
nuts securely in the sequence illusE ). Lower the veA ,䊊
B ,䊊
C ,䊊
D ,䊊
trated (䊊
hicle completely.

WARNING
∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the
nuts to become loose.
∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the
vehicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened
to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for 3 hours or more or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the
Tire Load and Information label affixed
to the driver side center pillar.
5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking
equipment in the vehicle.

NOTE:
You may need to remove the wheel cap
in order to secure the damaged tire using the spare tire clamp.
7. Close the trunk.

WARNING
∙ Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly
secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.
∙ The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information,
refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Doit-yourself ” section of this manual.

6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk
floor carpeting over the damaged tire.

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
nuts to the specified torque with a
torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

In case of emergency 6-9

JUMP STARTING
To start your engine with a booster battery,
the instructions and precautions below
must be followed.

WARNING
∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting
in severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away from
the battery.
∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a
corrosive sulfuric acid solution which
can cause severe burns. If the fluid
should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
∙ The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.

6-10 In case of emergency

∙ Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove
rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery
when jump starting.
∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause
serious injury.
∙ Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.

CAUTION
∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to positive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body
ground (for example, strut mounting
bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to
the battery.
∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine
compartment and that the cable
clamps do not contact any other
metal.

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage
to the charging system and cause personal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring
their batteries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to
touch.

LCE2223

6. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and let it run for a few minutes.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift
lever to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater,
air conditioner, etc.).

7. Keep the engine speed of the booster
vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the
engine of the vehicle being jump
started.

3. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
4. Ensure the vent caps are level and
tight.
5. Connect the jumper cables in the seA ,䊊
B ,䊊
C ,䊊
D ).
quence illustrated (䊊

CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged
for more than 10 seconds. If the engine
does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and
wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
8. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then
the positive cable.

In case of emergency 6-11

PUSH STARTING

CAUTION
∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The
three-way catalyst may be damaged.
∙ Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models cannot be push-started
or tow-started. Attempting to do so
may cause transmission damage.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by
an extremely high temperature gauge
reading), or if you feel a lack of engine
power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the
following steps.

WARNING
∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.
∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator cap while
the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot
water will spurt out, possibly causing
serious injury.
∙ Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the
shift lever to P (Park).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high
speed.

6-12 In case of emergency

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen
for steam or coolant escaping from the
radiator before opening the hood. (If
steam or coolant is escaping, turn off
the engine.) Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be
seen.
4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the
engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage
or looseness. Also check if the cooling
fan is running. The radiator hoses and
radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is
missing or loose, or the cooling fan
does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or
the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
6. After the engine cools down, check the
coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running.
Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for
towing must be followed. Incorrect towing
equipment could damage your vehicle.
Towing instructions are available from a
NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are
generally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure
proper towing and to prevent accidental
damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your
vehicle. It is advisable to have the service
operator carefully read the following precautions:

WARNING
∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
∙ Never get under your vehicle after it
has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION
∙ When towing, make sure that the
transmission, axles, steering system
and powertrain are in working condition. If any of these conditions apply,
dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be
used.
∙ Always attach safety chains before
towing.
For additional information, refer to “Flat
towing” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle
based upon the type of drivetrain. For additional information, refer to the diagrams in
this section to ensure that your vehicle is
properly towed.

In case of emergency 6-13

– Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. Never
secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK
position. This may damage the
steering lock mechanism (for
models with a steering lock
mechanism).

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a
stuck vehicle)
LCE2369

2WD models with Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT)
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (front) wheels off the
ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed
truck as illustrated.

CAUTION
∙ Never tow CVT models with the front
wheels on the ground or four wheels
on the ground (forward or backward),
as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it
is necessary to tow the vehicle with
the rear wheels raised always use
towing dollies under the front wheels.
∙ When towing CVT models with the
rear wheels on the ground or on towing dollies:

6-14 In case of emergency

WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when recovering a
stuck vehicle:
∙ Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any
questions regarding the recovery
procedure.
∙ Tow chains or cables must be attached only to main structural members of the vehicle.
∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to
tow or free a stuck vehicle.

∙ Only use devices specifically designed
for vehicle recovery and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
∙ Always pull the recovery device
straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle.
∙ Route recovery devices so they do not
touch any part of the vehicle except
the attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind
the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
backward.
∙ Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive).
∙ Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.
∙ Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive).
∙ Do not spin the tires above 35 mph
(55 km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a
few tries, contact a professional towing
service to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-15

MEMO

6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . .
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Most common factors contributing to
vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental factors influence the
rate of corrosion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . .

7-5
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-7

CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of
your vehicle, it is important to take proper
care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain.
∙ After driving on coastal roads.
∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or
bugs get on the paint surface.
∙ When dust or mud builds up on the surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in
a shady area or protect the vehicle with a
body cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the
body cover.

WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed
with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION
∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some
acid for cleaning. The acid may react
with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This
could affect their appearance, and
also could cause them not to function
properly. Always check with your car
wash to confirm that acid is not used.

∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of
clean water.
Inside edges, seams and folds on the
doors, hatches and hood are particularly
vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.
Take care that the drain holes in the lower
edge of the door are open. Spray water
under the body and in the wheel wells to
loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the
vehicle to avoid water spots.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.

WAXING

∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot,
as the surface may become
water-spotted.

Regular waxing protects the paint surface
and helps retain new vehicle appearance.
Polishing is recommended to remove
built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer to assist you in choosing the proper
product.

7-2 Appearance and care

∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.

The high-mounted stop light must be
properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle.

∙ Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners
that may damage the vehicle finish.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and
dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film
after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.
Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily
remove this film.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible
from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning
products are available at a NISSAN dealer
or any automotive accessory store. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it
is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from
building up and causing the acceleration of
corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in
the spring, the underseal must be checked
and, if necessary, re-treated.

CAUTION

WAI0005

GLASS
When cleaning the rear window, it may be
easier to clean if the inside high-mounted
stop light (if so equipped) is removed first.
Be careful when removing the highmounted stop light to reduce the risk of
damaging the high-mounted stop light
wires.
To remove the high-mounted stop light:
1
䊊
2
䊊

Push toward rear of vehicle.

When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools,
abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based
disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so
equipped)
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge
dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where
road salt is used. If not removed, road salt
can discolor the wheels.

Lift to remove.

Appearance and care 7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR

CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
acid or alkali contents to clean the
wheels.
∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as
ambient temperature.
∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after
the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a
non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain
the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a
coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound
may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.

7-4 Appearance and care

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The
coating on the tire dissolves more easily
than with an oil-based tire dressing.
∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).
∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is
completely removed from the tire
tread/grooves.
∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the
interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a
vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe
the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in
mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in
order to maintain the appearance of the
leather (if so equipped).
Before using any fabric protector, read the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some
fabric protectors contain chemicals that
may stain or bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to
clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the
operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

CAUTION
∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any
similar material.
∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive
and damaging to leather surfaces
and should be removed promptly. Do
not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather’s
natural finish.

∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip
on the vents. These products can cause
immediate damage and discoloration
when spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions before using the air fresheners.

∙ Never use fabric protectors unless
recommended by the manufacturer.

LAI0009

∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may
damage the lens cover.

FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)

AIR FRESHENERS

To avoid potential pedal interference
that may result in a collision, injury or
death:

Most air fresheners use a solvent that
could affect the vehicle interior. If you use
an air freshener, take the following precautions:
∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
permanent discoloration when they
contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place
the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an
interior surface.

WARNING

∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position or install them upside down or
backwards.

Appearance and care 7-5

∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
or equivalent floor mats, that are specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and model year.
∙ Properly position the mats in the
floorwell using the floor mat positioning hook. For additional information,
refer to "Floor mat installation" in this
section.
∙ Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation.
∙ Periodically check the floor mats to
make sure they are properly installed.
∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior,
check the floor mats to make sure
they are properly installed.
The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and
make it easier to clean the interior. Mats
should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

Floor mat installation
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and shape of

7-6 Appearance and care

the floor mat positioning hooks for each
seating position varies depending on the
vehicle.
When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
follow the installation instructions provided
with the mat and the following:
1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the
shift lever in P (Park) position and with
the parking brake fully applied, position
the floor mat in the floorwell so that the
floor mat grommet holes are aligned
with the hook(s).
2. Secure the grommet holes into the
hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is
properly positioned.
3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. With the ignition still in the OFF position, the shift
lever in the P (Park) position and with
the parking brake applied, fully apply
and release all pedals. The floor mat
must not interfere with pedal operation or prevent the pedal from returning to its normal position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for details about installing the floor
mats in your vehicle.

LAI2045

Positioning hooks
The illustration shows the location of the
floor mat positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping
them with a sponge dampened in a mild
soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. For
additional information, refer to “Seat belt
maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system”
section of this manual.

CORROSION PROTECTION

WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in
the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat
belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION

freezing and where atmospheric pollution
exists and road salt is used.

Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

High temperatures accelerate the rate of
corrosion to those parts which are not well
ventilated.

∙ The
accumulation
of
moistureretaining dirt and debris in body panel
sections, cavities, and other areas.
∙ Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor traffic collisions.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on
the vehicle body underside can accelerate
corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry
completely inside the vehicle and should
be removed for drying to avoid floor panel
corrosion.

Temperature

Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in
the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt
use accelerates the corrosion process.
Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to
keep the vehicle clean.
∙ Always check for minor damage to the
paint and repair it as soon as possible.

Relative humidity

∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the
doors open to avoid water accumulation.

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of
high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above

∙ Check the underbody for accumulation
of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with
water as soon as possible.

Appearance and care 7-7

CAUTION

∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose.
Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or
broom.

A license plate frame could vibrate and
cause noise or paint damage. To avoid
damage or noise, add a soft adhesive
pad with a maximum thickness of 1/8 in
(4 mm) to the back lower edge of the
license plate frame.

∙ Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing
are extremely corrosive. They accelerate
corrosion and deterioration of underbody
components such as the exhaust system,
fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan
and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be
cleaned periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some
areas, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.

7-8 Appearance and care

LAI2001

License plate bracket padding
1. License plate
2. Trunk
3. License plate frame
4. Padding

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Power Steering Fluid (PSF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take
care to prevent serious accidental injury to
yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which
should be closely observed.

WARNING
∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
∙ Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or
LOCK position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
∙ If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans,
belts and any other moving parts.
∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.
∙ Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.

8-2 Do-it-yourself

∙ Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come
on at any time without warning, even
if the ignition key is in the OFF position
and the engine is not running. To
avoid injury, always disconnect the
negative battery cable before working near the fan.
∙ If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
∙ On gasoline engine models, the fuel
filter or fuel lines should be serviced. It
is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service because
the fuel lines are under high pressure
even when the engine is off.

CAUTION
∙ Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.

∙ Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.
∙ Never leave the engine or the transmission related component harness
connector disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
∙ Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component
while the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
This “Do-it-yourself ” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are
relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also
available. For additional information, refer
to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
You should be aware that incomplete or
improper servicing may result in operating
difficulties or excessive emissions, and
could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt
about any servicing, it is recommended
that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
QR25DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Power steering fluid reservoir
Engine coolant reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Brake fluid reservoir
Air cleaner
Fuse/Fusible link box
Battery
Engine oil dipstick
Radiator cap
Drive belt location
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI2111

Do-it-yourself 8-3

VQ35DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

LDI2112

8-4 Do-it-yourself

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the
factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%
Genuine
NISSAN
Long
Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to
provide year-round antifreeze and coolant
protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are
not necessary.

WARNING
∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. For additional information on precautions, refer to “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
∙ The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine
NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION
∙ Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer. Additives
may clog the cooling system and
cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system.
∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is prediluted to provide antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). If additional
freeze protection is needed due to
weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concentrate following the directions on the
container. If an equivalent coolant
other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The
use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent may damage the engine
cooling system.

∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill
coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
or 7 years. Mixing any other type of
coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue),
including Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use
of non-distilled water will reduce the
life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer
to the "Maintenance and schedules"
section of this manual.

Do-it-yourself 8-5

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing
any other type of coolant or the use of
non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this
manual.

LDI2750

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir
when the engine is cold. If the coolant
B , add coolant
level is below the MIN level 䊊
A . If the reservoir is empty,
to the MAX level 䊊
check the coolant level in the radiator
when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
with coolant up to the filler opening and
also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX
A .
level 䊊

8-6 Do-it-yourself

For additional information on the location
of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “Engine compartment check locations” in this
section.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine
coolant. The service procedure can be
found in the NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheating.

WARNING
∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the
engine is hot.
∙ Never remove the radiator cap when
the engine is hot. Serious burns could
be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.
∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.

ENGINE OIL

LDI2120

QR25DE engine

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than
10 minutes for the oil to drain back
into the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
Reinsert it all the way.

LDI2121

VQ35DE engine

LDI2812

QR25DE engine
5. Remove the dipstick again and check
the oil level. It should be between the H
B . This is the
(High) and L (Low) marks 䊊
normal operating oil level range. If the
A ,
oil level is below the L (Low) mark 䊊
remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening.
C .
Do not overfill 䊊
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

Do-it-yourself 8-7

WDI0214

VQ35DE engine

CAUTION
∙ Oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the
engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.
∙ It is normal to add some oil between
oil maintenance intervals or during
the break-in period, depending on the
severity of operating conditions.

8-8 Do-it-yourself

LDI2866

CHANGING ENGINE OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature, then
turn it off.
A by turning it
3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊
counterclockwise.

LDI2558

VQ35DE engine only
B from the under4. Remove the pins 䊊
cover. Gently pull the undercover to
gain access to the drain plug. (VQ35DE
engine only)

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.
C
7. Clean and reinstall the drain plug 䊊
and a new washer. Securely tighten the
drain plug with a wrench. Do not use
excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:
25 ft-lb (34 N·m)

LDI2927

QR25DE
5. Place a large drain pan under the drain
C .
plug 䊊

C with a
6. Remove the drain plug 䊊
wrench by turning it counterclockwise
and completely drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove
and replace it at this time. For additional information, refer to “Changing
engine oil filter” in this section.
∙ Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
∙ Check your local regulations.

LDI2634

VQ35DE

WARNING
∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin
cancer.
∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.

8. Refill engine with recommended oil
through the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler cap securely.
For additional information on drain
and refill capacity, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
The drain and refill capacity depends
on the oil temperature and drain time.
Use these specifications for reference
only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is
in the engine.
9. Start the engine. Check for leakage
around the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as required.

Do-it-yourself 8-9

10. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level with the
dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil
B.
filter 䊊
A from the right engine
4. Remove pins 䊊
protector located inside right wheel
well, remove protector. Remove oil filter
B with an oil filter wrench by turning it
䊊
counterclockwise. Then remove the oil
filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface
with a clean rag.

CAUTION

LDI2814

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.

8-10 Do-it-yourself

∙ Be sure to remove any old gasket
material remaining on the sealing
surface of the engine. Failure to do
so could lead to an oil leak and engine damage.
∙ The dipstick must be inserted in
place to prevent oil spillage from
the dipstick hole when filling the
engine with oil.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with
clean engine oil.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional
2/3 turn.
8. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary.

POWER STEERING FLUID (PSF)

CAUTION
∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine
NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent)
ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with
other fluids.
∙ Do not use Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission
fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the
use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under
NISSAN’s
New
Vehicle
Limited
Warranty.
∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may
also damage the CVT. Damage caused
by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under
NISSAN’s
New
Vehicle
Limited
Warranty.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid
is required, it is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI2752

Check the fluid level in the reservoir.
The fluid level should be checked when the
fluid is cold at fluid temperatures of 32 to
86F (0 to 30C). The fluid level can be
checked with the level gauge which is attached to the cap. To check the fluid level,
remove the cap. The fluid level should be
A and MIN 䊊
B lines.
between the MAX 䊊

B line, add
If the fluid is below the MIN 䊊
Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent. Remove the cap and fill through the opening.

Do-it-yourself 8-11

BRAKE FLUID

WARNING

∙ Brake fluid is poisonous and should
be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children.

Power steering fluid is poisonous and
should be stored carefully in marked
containers out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid
is spilled, immediately wash the surface
with water.

∙ DO NOT OVERFILL.
∙ Use of a power steering fluid other
than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or
equivalent will prevent the power
steering system from operating
properly.
LDI2753

For additional information on brake fluid
specification, refer to “Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING
∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake system.
The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the
vehicle’s stopping ability.
∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.

8-12 Do-it-yourself

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the
B , the
brake fluid is below the MIN line 䊊
brake warning light will illuminate. Add
A . For addibrake fluid up to the MAX line 䊊
tional information on recommended type
of brake fluid, refer to “Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the “
Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
If the brake fluid must be added frequently,
the brake system should be thoroughly
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when
driving conditions require an increased
amount of windshield-washer fluid.

∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the
fluid into the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir. Do not use the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir to mix the
washer fluid concentrate and water.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN
Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Antifreeze or equivalent.

WARNING
LDI2754

Antifreeze is poisonous and should be
stored carefully in marked containers
out of the reach of children.

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir
periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid
when the “Low Washer Fluid” warning appears in the vehicle information display.

∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze
coolant for windshield-washer fluid.
This may result in damage to the
paint.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,
lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the
windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir
opening.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl
alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the
grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR

Add a washer solvent to the washer for
better cleaning. In the winter season, add a

CAUTION

Do-it-yourself 8-13

BATTERY
∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Any corrosion should be washed off
with a solution of baking soda and water.
∙ Make certain the terminal connections
are clean and securely tightened.
∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for
30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent
discharge.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.

8-14 Do-it-yourself

WARNING
∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid
in the battery is low. Low battery fluid
can cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
∙ When working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protection
and remove all jewelry.
∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
caps tight and the battery level.
∙ Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of
children.

∙ Do not expose the battery to flames,
an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery
is explosive. Explosive gases can
cause blindness or injury. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your skin,
eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your
eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If
the acid contacts your eyes, skin or
clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or
under severe conditions require frequent
checks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump
starting” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. If the engine does not
start by jump starting, the battery may
have to be replaced. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WDI0224

1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as shown. Use a cloth to protect
the battery case.

WDI0529

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level up to the
bottom of the filler opening. Do not
overfill. Reinstall the vent caps.

Do-it-yourself 8-15

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM

DRIVE BELT
The current sensor is located near the battery along the negative battery cable. If you
add electrical accessories to your vehicle,
be sure to ground them to a suitable body
ground such as the frame or engine block
area.

LDI2130

LDI2132

CAUTION
∙ Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely.
∙ Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable
voltage control system. This system measures the amount of electrical discharge
from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator.

8-16 Do-it-yourself

QR25DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Crankshaft pulley
Drive belt automatic tensioner pulley
Water pump pulley
Generator pulley
Air compressor pulley

SPARK PLUGS
have it replaced or adjusted. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for
condition and tension in accordance
with the maintenance schedule found
in the "Maintenance and schedules"
section of this manual.

LDI2131

VQ35DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.

Crankshaft pulley
Drive belt automatic tensioner pulley
Generator pulley
Air compressor pulley
WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt. The engine could rotate
unexpectedly.
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If
the belt is in poor condition or is loose,

SDI1895

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace iridiumA spark plugs as frequently as contipped 䊊
ventional type spark plugs because they
last much longer. Follow the maintenance
log shown in the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual. Do not service
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or
regapping.
∙ Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.

Do-it-yourself 8-17

AIR CLEANER

WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch
are off and that the parking brake is
engaged securely.

CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect
socket can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
LDI2117

QR25DE
NOTE:
The air cleaner filter should not be
cleaned and reused.
Replace the air cleaner filter according to
the maintenance log shown in the ”Maintenance and schedules” section of this
manual.
To remove the air cleaner filter:
∙ Unlatch the clips and move the air
cleaner cover upward.
∙ Remove the air cleaner filter.

8-18 Do-it-yourself

LDI2118

VQ35DE
∙ Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter
housing and the cover with a damp
cloth.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
NOTE:
After installing a new air cleaner filter,
make sure the air cleaner cover is seated
in the housing and latch the clips.

WARNING
∙ Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or
others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleans the air, it stops the
flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t
there, and the engine backfires, you
could be burned. Do not drive with the
air cleaner removed, and be careful
when working on the engine with the
air cleaner removed.
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body
or attempt to start the engine with
the air cleaner removed. Doing so
could result in serious injury.

If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using
the windshield–washer or if a wiper blade
chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer fluid or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when
rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after
cleaning the blades and using the wiper,
install new windshield wiper blades.

CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry
of airborne dust and pollen particles and
reduces some objectionable outside
odors. The filter is located behind the glove
box. For additional information, refer to the
"Maintenance and schedules" section of
this manual for change intervals.

Do-it-yourself 8-19

CAUTION
∙ After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when
the hood is opened.
∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact
the glass; otherwise the arms may be
damaged from wind pressure.

LDI2757

REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
To replace the windshield wiper blades, follow the procedure below:
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
B.
2. Push the release tab 䊊

A down and re3. Move the wiper blade 䊊
move.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the
wiper arm until it clicks into place.
5. Push wiper on to windshield.

8-20 Do-it-yourself

LDI2731

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle
D . This may cause clogging or improper
䊊
windshield-washer operation. If wax gets
into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or
C .
small pin 䊊

BRAKES

FUSES

If the brakes do not operate properly, have
the brakes checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front and rear disc-type brakes selfadjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other
noise may be heard. Occasional brake
noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or
performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information regarding brake inspections, refer to the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the "Maintenance and schedules"
section of this manual.

WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the
brake pedal height does not return to
normal. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have
audible wear indicators. When a brake pad
requires replacement, a high pitched
scraping or screeching sound will be heard
when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will
be heard whether or not the brake pedal is
depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.

LDI2385

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
Fuses are used in the passenger and engine compartment. Spare fuses are provided and can be found in the passenger
compartment fuse box.
When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is
installed in the fuse box securely.

Do-it-yourself 8-21

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing
the tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
The fuse puller is located in the center
of the fuse block in the passenger
compartment.

LDI2133

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not come
on, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the
headlight switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.

8-22 Do-it-yourself

LDI0456

A , replace it with a
5. If the fuse is open 䊊
B.
new fuse 䊊

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check
the fusible links. If any of these fusible links
are melted, replace with only Genuine
NISSAN parts.

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the
headlight switch are in the OFF position.
2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

LDI2869

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

LDI2827

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
A .
䊊

WARNING
Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or electronic control
units or cause a fire.

Do-it-yourself 8-23

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts.

LDI2760

B , replace it with an
4. If the fuse is open 䊊
C .
equivalent good fuse 䊊

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

LDI2001

8-24 Do-it-yourself

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as
follows:

Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.

1. Remove the mechanical key from the
Intelligent Key.
A into the
2. Insert a small screwdriver 䊊
B of the corner and twist it to sepaslit 䊊
rate the upper part from the lower part.
Use a cloth to protect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or
equivalent.

WDI0568

∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with
C and 䊊
D.
䊊

∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact
points will seriously deplete the storage capacity.
∙ Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom of the case.

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service if you need assistance for replacement.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and

Do-it-yourself 8-25

LIGHTS
HEADLIGHTS
For additional information on headlight
bulb replacement, refer to the instructions
outlined in this section.

Replacing the halogen headlight
bulb (if so equipped)

∙ Do not leave the headlight assembly
open without a bulb installed for a
long period of time. Dust, moisture,
smoke, etc. entering the headlight
body may affect bulb performance.
Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly just before a replacement
bulb is installed.

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type
which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. They can be replaced from inside
the engine compartment without removing the headlight assembly.

∙ Only touch the base when handling
the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and/or headlight performance.

If headlight bulb replacement is required, it
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is
scratched or the bulb is dropped.

CAUTION
∙ Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment
is necessary, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

8-26 Do-it-yourself

∙ Use the same number and wattage as
shown in the chart.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens
of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car
wash. A temperature difference between
the inside and the outside of the lens
causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If
large drops of water collect inside the lens,
it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Replacing the LED headlight bulb
(if so equipped)
If LED headlight bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
For additional information on fog light bulb
replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.

Replacing the fog light bulb
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
A ; carefully pull
2. Remove the fasteners 䊊
back the front fender protector.
B counterclockwise
3. Rotate the bulb 䊊
and pull out to remove.

Reverse steps to install.

LDI2940

Do-it-yourself 8-27

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item
Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*
Low (Halogen)
High (Halogen)
Turn/Park
Side marker
Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*
Low
High (Halogen)
Daytime running
Turn/Park
Side marker
Fog light assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)
Fog
Daytime running*
Fog light assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)
Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)*
Map light*
Courtesy light
Vanity mirror light*
Glove box light*
Step light (if so equipped)
Personal light*
Trunk light
High-mounted stop light*
Inside (if so equipped)
Spoiler (if so equipped)
Rear combination light*
Stop/Tail
Turn
Tail
Side marker
Backup (reversing)*
License plate light*

Wattage (W)

Bulb No.*

55
65
28/8
5

H11
H9
7444NA
W5W

—
65
—
28/8
5

—
H9
—
7444NA
W5W

55
19
55
—
—
—
1.8
1.4
3.8
8
3.4

H11
PS19W
H11
—
—
—
—
—
194
—
158

—
—

21/5
21
5
5
18
5

W21/5W
WY21W
W5W
W5W
921
W5W

* Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance.

8-28 Do-it-yourself

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Door mirror turn signal light (if so
equipped)
Headlamp assembly
Front map light
Fog light assembly (if so equipped)
High-mount stop light (spoiler)
(if so equipped)
High-mount stop light (inside)
(if so equipped)
Personal light
Step light (if so equipped)
Rear combination light
Backup (reverse) light
License plate light

LDI2906

Do-it-yourself 8-29

LDI0341

Step light (if so equipped)
1 to protect the housing.
Use a cloth 䊊
Rear combination light

WDI0306

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the
lens, light and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation

8-30 Do-it-yourself

Bulb replacement requires the removal of
the rear combination light assembly. If replacement is required, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI2135

Trunk light

WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in
the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment.
Those who use a pacemaker
should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for
the possible influences before
use.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
It monitors tire pressure of all tires
except the spare. When the low tire
pressure warning light is lit and the
“Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning
appears in the vehicle information
display, one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above

16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system
may not detect a sudden drop in tire
pressure (for example a flat tire while
driving).
For additional information, refer to
“Low tire pressure warning light” in the
“Instruments and controls” section,
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving”
section, and “Flat tire” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.

Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including
the spare) often and always prior to
long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications
are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label or the Tire and
Loading Information label under the
"Cold Tire Pressure" heading. The
Tire and Loading Information label is
affixed to the driver side center pillar.
Tire pressures should be checked
regularly because:

∙ Most tires naturally lose air over
time.
∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a
curb while parking.
The tire pressures should be
checked when the tires are cold. The
tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or
more hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert
provides visual and audible signals
outside the vehicle for inflating the
tires to the recommended COLD tire
pressure. For additional information,
refer to “TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire
Alert” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
If the tires are used at speeds above
100 mph (162 km/h) where it is legal
to do so (on a race track for example), the cold tire inflation pressure must be increased. For addiDo-it-yourself 8-31

tional information, refer to “Checking
tire pressure” in this section.
Set the tire pressure to the normal
cold tire inflation pressure when the
vehicle speed or load is reduced.
Incorrect tire pressure, including
under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly
and
cause
an
accident.

8-32 Do-it-yourself

∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label. The vehicle weight
capacity is indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
Do not load your vehicle beyond
this capacity. Overloading your
vehicle may result in reduced
tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling
characteristics and could also
lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.
∙ Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure
gauge to ensure that the tire
pressures are at the specified
level.

∙ Increase the cold tire inflation
pressure as indicated in "Checking tire pressure" in this section
when using the tires specified
by NISSAN above 100 mph
(162 km/h) where it is legal to do
so (on a race track for example).
Failure to increase the cold tire
inflation pressure may result in
tire failure, loss of control and
possible injury. After such use,
readjust tire pressure.
∙ For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

4
䊊
5
䊊
6
䊊

Tire and Loading Information
label
1
䊊

2
䊊

Seating capacity: The maximum
number of occupants that can
be seated in the vehicle.
Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” in
this section.

3
䊊

Original tire size: The size of the
tires originally installed on the
vehicle at the factory.
Spare tire size.
Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Vehicle loading information” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

LDI2737

Cold tire pressure: Inflate the
tires to this pressure when the
tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours,
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is
set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire
wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s GVWR.
Do-it-yourself 8-33

3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the
gauge stem and compare to the
specification shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label.

LDI0393

Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from
the tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge
squarely onto the valve stem. Do
not press too hard or force the
valve stem sideways, or air will
escape. If the hissing sound of air
escaping from the tire is heard
while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate
this leakage.
8-34 Do-it-yourself

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If
too much air is added, press the
core of the valve stem briefly
with the tip of the gauge stem to
release pressure. Recheck the
pressure and add or release air
as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other
tires, including the spare.

Size
Front Original Tire

Rear Original Tire

Spare Tire

P215/60R16
P215/55R17
P235/45R18
P215/60R16
P215/55R17
P235/45R18
T135/70D16

Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
220 kPa, 32 PSI
230 kPa, 33 PSI
220 kPa, 32 PSI
230 kPa, 33 PSI
420 kPa, 60 PSI
WDI0394

Example

TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires.
This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides
the Tire Identification Number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
Do-it-yourself 8-35

6. Two- or three-digit number (95):
This number is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of how
much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is
not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should
not drive the vehicle faster than
the tire speed rating.
WDI0395

1
䊊

Example

Tire size (example: P215/65R15
95H)
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles
(not all tires have this information).
2. Three-digit number (215): This
number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall
edge to sidewall edge.

8-36 Do-it-yourself

3. Two-digit number (65): This
number, known as the aspect
ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of
height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (15): This number is the wheel or rim diameter
in inches.

3 Tire ply composition and material
䊊

The number of layers or plies of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester and others.
4 Maximum permissible inflation
䊊
pressure

LDI2786

Example

2 TIN (Tire Identification Number)
䊊
for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX
XXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department Of Transportation”.
The symbol can be placed
above, below or to the left or
right of the Tire Identification
Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
5. Four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built.
For example, the numbers 3103
means the 31st week of 2003. If
these numbers are missing then
look on the other sidewall of the
tire.

This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure.
5 Maximum load rating
䊊

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.

Do-it-yourself 8-37

6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
䊊

Indicates whether the tire requires
an inner tube (“tube type”) or not
(“tubeless”).
7 The word “radial”
䊊

The word “radial” is shown if the tire
has radial structure.
8 Manufacturer or brand name
䊊

Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that
are defined throughout this section,
Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the
sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model
name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on
the other sidewall of the tire, or (2)
the outward facing sidewall of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.
8-38 Do-it-yourself

TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
∙ When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information
about tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
∙ Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory
equipped tires, and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum
speed rating of the tire.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the low tire
pressure warning system.

∙ Always use tires of the same type,
size, brand, construction and tread
pattern on all four wheels. Failure to
do so may result in a circumference
difference between tires on the front
and rear axles which can cause the
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system
to malfunction resulting in personal
injury or death, excessive tire wear
and may damage the transmission
and differential gears.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some
models to provide good performance all
year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL
SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.
Snow tires have better snow traction than
All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance

on dry roads. Summer tire performance is
substantially reduced in snow and ice.
Summer tires do not have the tire traction
rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy
or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the
use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all
four wheels.

Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to
select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do
not, it can adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may
not match the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum speed
rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the
same size, brand, construction and tread
pattern on all four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit
their use. Check local, state and provincial
laws before installing studded tires. Skid
and traction capabilities of studded snow

tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION
Only certain SAE class “S” tire chains can
be used on this vehicle. Using the wrong
Class “S” chains on this vehicle will
cause damage to the vehicle. If you plan
to use tire chains/cables, you should
use a tire chain that meets the minimum clearances for your vehicle.
LDI0574

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws
before installing tire chains. When installing
tire chains, make sure they are the proper
size for the tires on your vehicle and are
installed according to the chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Use a tire chain that is
A
designed to provide the specified space 䊊
1 and
between the installed tire chain 䊊
2 as shown
where the tire meets the rim 䊊
on the chart.

Do-it-yourself 8-39

NOTE:
Tire chains are not permitted for use
with 18 in wheels.
Wheel size

Minimum space required

16 in

.7 in (17 mm)

17 in

.2 in (4 mm)

A tire chain that provides the specified
amount of space will provide the necessary clearance between the tire and the
closest vehicle suspension or body component. The minimum clearances are determined using the factory-equipped tires.
Other types may damage your vehicle. Use
chain tensioners when recommended by
the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a
tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage
to the fenders or underbody. If possible,
avoid fully loading your vehicle when using
tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced
speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be
damaged and/or vehicle handling and
performance may be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

8-40 Do-it-yourself

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving
with tire chains in such conditions can
cause damage to the various mechanisms
of the vehicle due to some overstress.

WDI0258

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the
tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
For additional information on tire replacing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”
in the “In case of emergency” section
of this manual.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times.
It is recommended that wheel nuts
be tightened to specification at
each tire rotation interval.

∙
∙

WARNING
After rotating the tires, check
and adjust the tire pressure.
Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

WDI0259

Tire wear and damage
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
WARNING
∙ Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking,
bulging or objects caught in the
tread. If excessive wear, cracks,
bulging or deep cuts are found,
the tire(s) should be replaced.

∙ The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
∙ Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be
obvious. Replace the tires as
necessary to prevent tire failure
and possible personal injury.
∙ Improper service of the spare
tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to
repair the spare tire, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-41

Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size,
tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. For additional information, refer to “Wheels and
tires” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING
∙ The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires
of different brands, construction
(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread
patterns can adversely affect the ride,
braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire
chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper
height. Some of these effects may
lead to accidents and could result in
serious personal injury.

∙ If your vehicle was originally
equipped with four tires that were the
same size and you are only replacing
two of the four tires, install the new
tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires
on the front axle may cause loss of
vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an accident and personal injury
∙ If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels
which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set
could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system and/or interference with the brake discs. Such
interference can lead to decreased
braking efficiency and/or early brake
pad wear. For additional information
on wheel off-set dimensions, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of
this manual.

∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS, such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your
tires replaced and/or TPMS system
reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if
it is not handled correctly. Be careful
when handling the TPMS sensor.
∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the
ID registration may be required. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for ID registration.
∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not
specified by NISSAN. The valve stem
cap may become stuck.
∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are
correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve
may be clogged up with dirt and
cause a malfunction or loss of
pressure.

8-42 Do-it-yourself

∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could
have structural damage and could fail
without warning.
∙ The use of retread tires is not
recommended.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle
handling and tire life. Even with regular use,
wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,
they should be balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.

Care of wheels
∙ Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance.
∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when
the wheel is changed or the underside
of the vehicle is washed.
∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when
washing the wheels.
∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents
or corrosion. Such damage may cause
loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire
bead.
∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in
areas where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire)
When replacing a wheel without the TPMS
such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not
function.

WARNING
∙ The spare tire should be used for
emergency use only. It should be replaced with the standard tire at the
first opportunity to avoid possible tire
or differential damage.
∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
∙ Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).
∙ With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle
at speeds faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
∙ When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used
on the front wheels (drive wheels).

Observe the following precautions if the
TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be
used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be
damaged or involved in an accident:

Do-it-yourself 8-43

∙ Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster
rate than the standard tire. Replace
the spare tire as soon as the tread
wear indicators appear.
∙ Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
∙ Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION
∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains
will not fit properly and may cause
damage to the vehicle.
∙ Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive
the vehicle through an automatic car
wash since it may get caught.

8-44 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Explanation of general maintenance
items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5
Emission control system maintenance:. . . . . . . 9-5
Chassis and body maintenance:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Additional maintenance items for
severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Emission control system maintenance . . . . . . . 9-8
Chassis & body maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Maintenance under severe operating
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Severe driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your vehicle
good mechanical condition, as well as its
emissions and engine performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure
that the scheduled maintenance, as well as
general maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one
who can ensure that your vehicle receives
proper maintenance. You are a vital link in
the maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal
day-to-day operation. They are essential
for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures
regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks
requires minimal mechanical skill and only
a few general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done
by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you
prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The maintenance items listed in this section are required to be serviced at regular
intervals. However under severe driving
conditions, additional or more frequent
maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
If maintenance service is required or your
vehicle appears to malfunction, have the
systems checked and serviced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up-to-date with the
latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips and training programs. They are completely qualified to
work on NISSAN vehicles before work begins.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s service department can perform the
service needed to meet the maintenance
requirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of
the vehicle, general maintenance should
be performed regularly as prescribed in
this section. If you detect any unusual
sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to
check for the cause or have it checked
promptly. In addition, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think
that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the “Maintenance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with “ * ” is found in the “Do-ityourself ” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be performed from time to time, unless
otherwise specified.
Doors and engine hood: Check that the
doors and engine hood operate properly.
Also ensure that all latches lock securely.
Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers
and links if necessary. Make sure that the

secondary latch keeps the hood from
opening when the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or
other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular
basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop
lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other
lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are
missing, and check for any loose wheel
nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge
often and always prior to long distance
trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all
tires, including the spare, to the pressure
specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts
or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components: Replace the
TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core
and cap when the tires are replaced due to
wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving
on a straight and level road, or if you detect
uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may
be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
the Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a
regular basis. Check the windshield at least
every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired
by a qualified repair facility.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for
cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked on a regular basis, such as
when performing scheduled maintenance,
cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure the
pedal does not catch or require uneven
effort. Keep the floor mat away from the
pedal.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes
down further than normal, the pedal feels
spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer
to stop, have your vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the
floor mat away from the pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull
the vehicle to one side when applied.
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) P (Park) position mechanism: On a
fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held
securely with the shift lever in the P (Park)
position without applying any brakes.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake
operation regularly. The vehicle should be
securely held on a fairly steep hill with only
the parking brake applied. If the parking
brake needs adjustment, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Seats: Check seat position controls such
as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to
ensure they operate smoothly and all
latches lock securely in every position.
Check that the head restraints/headrests
move up and down smoothly and the locks
(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched
positions.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat
belt system (for example, buckles, anchors,
adjusters and retractors) operate properly
and smoothly, and are installed securely.
Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,
wear or damage.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering system, such as excessive free
play, hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating
properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly
and in sufficient quantity when operating
the heater or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check
that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked periodically (for example, each
time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery* (for serviceable batteries):
Check the fluid level in each cell. The fluid
should be at the bottom of the filler opening. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require
frequent checks of the battery fluid level.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake
fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines
on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant
level when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive
belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after
parking the vehicle on a level spot and
turning off the engine. Wait more than
15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the
oil pan.
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no
loose supports, cracks or holes. If the
sound of the exhaust seems unusual or
there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for
fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the
vehicle has been parked for a while. Water
dripping from the air conditioner after use
is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause
and have it corrected immediately.
Power steering fluid level* and lines:
Check the level when the fluid is cold, with
the engine off. Check the lines for proper
attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,
leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.
Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently
exposed to corrosive substances such as
those used on icy roads or to control dust. It
is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust may form on the
floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the
exhaust system. At the end of winter, the
underbody should be thoroughly flushed
with plain water, being careful to clean
those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. For additional information, refer to
the “Appearance and care” section of this
manual.

The following descriptions are provided to
give you a better understanding of the
scheduled maintenance items that should
be regularly checked or replaced. The
maintenance schedule indicates at which
mileage/time intervals each item requires
service.
In addition to scheduled maintenance,
your vehicle requires that some items be
checked during normal day-to-day operation. For additional information, refer to
“General maintenance” in this section.
Items marked with “*” are recommended
by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.
You are not required to perform maintenance on these items in order to maintain
the warranties which come with your
NISSAN. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
When applicable, additional information
can be found in the “Do-it-yourself ” section
of this manual.

NOTE:
NISSAN does not advocate the use of
non-OEM approved aftermarket flushing systems and strongly advises
against performing these services on a
NISSAN product. Many of the aftermarket flushing systems use non-OEM approved chemicals or solvents, the use of
which has not been validated by NISSAN.
For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,
grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE:
Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for
wear, fraying or cracking and for proper
tension. Replace any damaged drive belts.
Engine air filter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in
dusty conditions, check/replace the filter
more frequently.

Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that
there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the
specified interval. When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For
additional information on the proper mixture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling
system” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of
this manual.)
NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant
or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the recommended service interval
of the coolant.
Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil
and oil filter at the specified intervals. For
recommended oil grade and viscosity refer
to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if
valve noise increases. Adjust valve clearance if necessary.
Evaporative emissions control vapor
lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness. Tighten connections or replace parts
as necessary.
Fuel filter: Periodic maintenance is not required. (in-tank type filter)

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping
and connections for leaks, looseness, or
deterioration. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals.
Install new plugs of the type as originally
equipped.

CHASSIS AND BODY
MAINTENANCE:
Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for
proper installation. Check for chafing,
cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.
Replace any deteriorated or damaged
parts immediately.
Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear,
deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any
deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Exhaust system: Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,
cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten
connections or replace parts as necessary.
In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified
intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, replace the filter
more frequently.

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts, drive shaft boots: Check
for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil
or grease. Under severe driving conditions,
inspect more frequently.
Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every
5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the instructions under “General maintenance” in
this section. When rotating tires, check for
damage and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.
Transmission fluid/oil: Visually inspect for
signs of leakage at specified intervals.
If using a car-top carrier or driving on rough
or muddy roads:
∙ Replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km) or request the dealer to inspect the fluid deterioration data using
a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is
more than 210000, replace the CVT fluid.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
To help ensure smooth, safe and economical driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you
usually drive. These schedules contain
both distance and time intervals, up to
120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For
most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if
you drive very little, your vehicle should be
serviced at the regular time intervals
shown in the schedule.
After
120,000
miles
(192,000 km)/144 months, continue
maintenance at the same mileage/time
intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
FOR SEVERE OPERATING
CONDITIONS

STANDARD MAINTENANCE
∙ Repeated short trips of less than
10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
∙ Operating in hot weather in stopand-go “rush hour” traffic.
∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police,
taxi or door-to-door delivery use.
∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

The following tables show the standard
maintenance schedule. Depending upon
weather and atmospheric conditions,
varying road surfaces, individual driving
habits and vehicle usage, additional or
more frequent maintenance may be required.
After
120,000
miles
(192,000 km)/144 months, continue
maintenance at the same mileage/time
interval.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
∙ Using a car-top carrier.
NOTE:
For vehicles operated in Canada, both
standard and severe maintenance items
should be performed at every interval.

Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions should be performed on vehicles that are driven under
especially demanding conditions. Additional maintenance items should be performed if you primarily operate your vehicle
under the following conditions:
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Drive belts
Air cleaner filter
Engine oil
Engine oil filter
Engine coolant*
EVAP vapor lines
Fuel lines
Fuel filter
Spark plugs (Iridium - tipped type)
Intake and exhaust valve clearances*

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

5
(8)
6

10
(16)
12

15
(24)
18

20
(32)
24

R
R

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
25
30
35
40
(40)
(48)
(56)
(64)
30
36
42
48
I*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R

45
(72)
54

50
(80)
60
I*

55
(88)
66

R
R

60
(96)
72
I*
R
R
R

See NOTE (4)(5)
I*
I*
See NOTE (3)
See NOTE (6)
See NOTE (7)

I*
I*

Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

I*
I*

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Drive belts
Air cleaner filter
Engine oil
Engine oil filter
Engine coolant*
EVAP vapor lines
Fuel lines
Fuel filter
Spark plugs (Iridium - tipped type)
Intake and exhaust valve clearances*

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

65
(104)
78

70
(112)
84
I*

75
(120)
90

80
(128)
96
I*

R
R

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95
100
(136)
(144)
(152)
(160)
102
108
114
120
I*
I*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R

105
(168)
126

110
(176)
132
I*

115
(184)
138

R
R

120
(192)
144
I*
R
R
R

See NOTE (4)(5)
I*
I*
See NOTE (3)
See NOTE (6)
See NOTE (7)

I*
I*

Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

NOTE:
(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if
found damaged.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.
(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles
(120,000 km) or 60 months.
(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50%
demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy
of the factory fill coolant.
(6) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 1.25 mm (0.049 in) even within specified periodic replacement mileage.
(7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform
such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and
intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
Brake lines and cables
Brake pads and rotors 夝
Brake fluid 夝
CVT fluid
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts
夝
Tire rotation
Front drive shaft boots 夝
Exhaust system 夝
In-cabin microfilter
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months

See NOTE (1)

5
(8)
6

10
(16)
12
I
I

15
(24)
18

20
(32)
24
I
I
R
I
I

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
25
30
35
40
(40)
(48)
(56)
(64)
30
36
42
48
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I

45
(72)
54

50
(80)
60
I
I
I

55
(88)
66

60
(96)
72
I
I
R
I
I

See NOTE (2)
I

I
I
R
I

I
R
R

I
I

I
R
R

I
I
R
R

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
Brake lines and cables
Brake pads and rotors 夝
Brake fluid 夝
CVT fluid
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts
夝
Tire rotation
Front drive shaft boots 夝
Exhaust system 夝
In-cabin microfilter
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months

See NOTE (1)

65
(104)
78

70
(112)
84
I
I

75
(120)
90

80
(128)
96
I
I
R
I
I

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95
100
(136)
(144)
(152) (160)
102
108
114
120
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I

105
(168)
126

110
(176)
132
I
I
I

115
(184)
138

120
(192)
144
I
I
R
I
I

See NOTE (2)
I

I
I
R
R

I
R
R

I
I

I
R
R

I
I
R
R

NOTE:
Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”.
(1) If using a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration every 60,000 miles (96,000 km),
then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT fluid every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km). It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
(2) For additional information, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE
OPERATING CONDITIONS
The maintenance intervals shown on the
preceding pages are for normal operating
conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated
under severe driving conditions as shown
below, more frequent maintenance must
be performed on the following items as
shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

∙ Repeated short trips of less than
10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
∙ Operating in hot weather in stopand-go “rush hour” traffic.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
∙ Using a car-top carrier.

∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distance, such as police, taxi
or door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).
Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.
Maintenance item
Brake fluid
Brake pads and rotors
Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts
Front drive shaft boots
Exhaust system

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance operation
Replace
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect

Maintenance interval
Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE LOG

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or
120 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

MEMO

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Fuel recommendation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
When traveling or registering in another
country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-11

Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Installing front license plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Emission control system warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type

Fuel
Engine oil*1
Drain and refill
*1: For additional
information, refer
to “Engine oil” in
the “Do-it-yourself ”
section of this
manual.
Engine coolant
with reservoir

With oil filter
change
Without oil
filter change
With oil filter
change
VQ35DE
Without oil
filter change
QR25DE
VQ35DE

Capacity (approximate)
Metric
US
Imperial
Measure
Measure
Measure
68 L

18 gal

15 gal

4.6 L

4-7/8 qt

4 qt

4.3 L

4-1/2 qt

3-3/4 qt

4.8 L

5-1/8 qt

4-1/4 qt

QR25DE

4.5 L

4-3/4 qt

4 qt

7.9 L
9.2 L

2-1/8 gal
2-3/8 gal

1-3/4 gal
2 gal

—

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid

Power Steering Fluid (PSF)

Refill to the proper level according to the
instructions in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.

Brake fluid

Refill to the proper level according to the
instructions in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

• For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in
this section.

• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended.
• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor
oil that matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional
information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations”
in this section.

• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
or equivalent
• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3
• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or
equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids.
Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid
NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids
other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent.
• Use of a power steering fluid other than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF
may prevent the power steering system from operating
properly.
• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*3 or equivalent
DOT 3.
*3 Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer

Fluid type

Multi-purpose grease

Capacity (approximate)
Metric
US
Imperial
Measure
Measure
Measure
—
—
—

Air conditioning system refrigerant

—

Air conditioning system oil

—

4.2 L

1-1/8 gal

7/8 gal

Windshield-washer fluid

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).

CAUTION
∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system
or other damage can occur if E-85 is
used in vehicles that are not designed
to run on E-85.
∙ Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect
the warranty coverage.

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

• NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)
• HFC-134a (R-134a)
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid or equivalent.

∙ Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel
containing more than 15% ethanol.
Using a fuel containing more than 15%
ethanol in a vehicle not specifically
designed for a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol can adversely affect
the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused
by such fuel is not covered by the
NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

∙ Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using
fuel containing MMT may adversely
affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your
gasoline retailer for more details.
Note that Federal and California laws
prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

Technical and consumer information 10-3

Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that
meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)
specifications where it is available. Many of
the automobile manufacturers developed
this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance. Ask
your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are
specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards
cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl
Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with
or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of
fuels of which the oxygenate content and
the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask
your service station manager.

If any driveability problems such as engine
stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,
immediately change to a non-oxygenate
fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please
take the following precautions as the usage of
such fuels may cause vehicle performance
problems and/or fuel system damage.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates
can cause paint damage.

∙ The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
∙ If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 15% oxygenate.
∙ If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable
amount of appropriate cosolvents
and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors,
such methanol blends may cause fuel
system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure
that all methanol blends are suitable
for use in NISSAN vehicles.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

E–15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%
fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.
E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed
to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified with small, square,
orange and black label with the common
abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require
fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black
label with the common abbreviation or the
appropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSAN does not recommend the
use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may
adversely affect vehicle performance, including the emissions control system. Note
that while some fuel pumps label MMT
content, not all do, so you may have to
consult your gasoline retailer for more details.

Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane
booster, intake valve deposit removers,
etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of
these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be
harmful to the fuel system and engine.

spark knock even when using gasoline
of the stated octane rating, or if you hear
steady spark knock while holding a
steady speed on level roads, it is recommended that you have a NISSAN dealer
correct the condition. Failure to correct
the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for
which NISSAN is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in
spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,
which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above
symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not
a cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.

Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can
cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”
(“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping
noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine
damage. If you detect a persistent heavy

Technical and consumer information 10-5

Oil which may contain foreign matter or
has been previously used should not be
used.

Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness
changes with temperature. Because of
this, it is important to select the engine oil
viscosity based on the temperatures at
which the vehicle will be operated before
the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.
LTI2051

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade,
quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure
satisfactory engine life and performance.
For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in this section. NISSAN recommends the
use of an energy conserving oil in order to
improve fuel economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-

cation or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)
certification and SAE viscosity standard.
These oils have the API certification mark
on the front of the container. Oils which do
not have the specified quality label should
not be used as they could cause engine
damage.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not
necessary when the proper oil type is used
and maintenance intervals are followed.

10-6 Technical and consumer information

Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or
its equivalent for the reason described in
“Change intervals.”

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for
your engine are based on the use of the
specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil
and filter change intervals could reduce
engine life. Damage to the engine caused
by improper maintenance or use of incor-

rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is
not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS

Your engine was filled with a high-quality
engine oil when it was built. You do not have
to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter
change intervals depend upon how you
use your vehicle.

The air conditioner system in your
NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the
refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and
NISSAN A/C system oil Type S (DH-PS) or
the exact equivalents.

Operation under the following conditions
may require more frequent oil and filter
changes:
∙ repeated short distance driving at cold
outside temperatures
∙ driving in dusty conditions
∙ extensive idling
∙ stop and go commuting
For additional information, refer to the
“Maintenance and schedules” section of
this manual.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer when servicing your air conditioner
system.

CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil
will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system
components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does
not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain
government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during
automotive air conditioner system service.
A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover
and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.

Technical and consumer information 10-7

SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
Type
Cylinder arrangement
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Firing order

in (mm)
cu in (cm3)

QR25DE

VQ35DE

Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
4-cylinder in-line
3.504 x 3.937 (89.0 x 100.0)
151.82 (2,488)
1–3–4–2

Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°
3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)
213.45 (3,498)
1–2–3–4–5–6

Idle speed
CVT (in “N” position)
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle
speed)
CO % at idle
Spark plug
Spark plug gap (Nominal)

No adjustment is necessary.

in (mm)

Camshaft operation
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

10-8 Technical and consumer information

FXE20HE-11C
0.043 (1.1)

FXE22HR-11
0.043 (1.1)

Timing chain

WHEELS AND TIRES

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Wheel type

Size

Offset in
(mm)

Steel

16 x 7.0J

1.97 (50)

Aluminum

16 x 7.0J

1.97 (50)

Aluminum

17 x 7.5J

1.97 (50)

Aluminum

18 x 7.5J

2.17 (55)

T-type (Steel spare)

16 x 4T

1.18 (30)

T-type (Aluminum spare)

16 x 4T

1.18 (30)

Tire size

Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
2.5 L

in (mm)
in (mm)

191.9 (4,874)
72.0 (1,830)

S model
SV and SL models
SR model

in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)

57.8 (1,467)
57.8 (1,469)
58 (1,474)

SL model

in (mm)

57.9 (1,473)

S, SV and SL models

in (mm)

62.4 (1,585)

SR model

in (mm)

62.0 (1,575)

3.5 L
Front and Rear track
2.5 L
2.5 L
3.5 L

2.5 S model

P215/60R16

2.5 SV/SL and 3.5 SL models

P215/55R17

2.5 SR and 3.5 SL models

P235/45R18

Spare tire

T135/90D16

SL model
Wheelbase
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross axle weight rating
Front
Rear

in (mm)
lbs. (kg)
lbs. (kg)
lbs. (kg)

62.0 (1,575)
109.3 (2,775)
Refer to the
“F.M.V.S.S./C.M.
V.S.S. certification label” on
the center pillar between
the driver’s
side front and
rear doors.

Technical and consumer information 10-9

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first
find out if the fuel available is suitable for
your vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too
low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking
your vehicle to areas where appropriate
fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of
your vehicle to another country, state,
province or district, it may be necessary
to modify the vehicle to meet local laws
and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
emission control and safety standards
vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that
may result.

TI1050M

WTI0037

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
plate is attached as shown. This number is
the identification for your vehicle and is
used in the vehicle registration.

The vehicle identification number is located as shown.

10-10 Technical and consumer information

WTI0096

QR25DE

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as
shown.

LTI2133

VQ35DE

WTI0172

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION
LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label
contains valuable vehicle information, such
as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of
manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

Technical and consumer information 10-11

LTI2269

LTI0224

LTI2268

EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL

The emission control information label is
attached to the underside of the hood as
shown.

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. The label is
located as shown.

The air conditioner specification label is affixed to the underside of the hood as
shown.

10-12 Technical and consumer information

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

LTI2244

To mount the front license plate, attach the
license plate bracket to the bumper fascia
at the location marks (small dimples) using
A .
the two provided screws 䊊

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

WARNING
∙ It is extremely dangerous to
ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in
any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.

TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself
with the following terms before
loading your vehicle:
∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of
your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional
equipment, fluids, emergency
tools, and spare tire assembly.
This weight does not include
passengers and cargo.

∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight
of passengers and cargo.
∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle,
passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information
is
located
on
the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit
specified for the front or rear axle.
This information is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total
weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.

Technical and consumer information 10-13

∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load
limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified
of the load (passengers and
cargo) for the vehicle. This is the
maximum combined weight of
occupants and cargo that can be
loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load.
This information is located on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
∙ Cargo capacity - permissible
weight of cargo, the subtracted
weight of occupants from the
load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your
vehicle shown as “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo” on
the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of
occupants shown as “Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Information label.
To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight
of all occupants, then add the total
luggage weight. Examples are
shown in the following illustration.

10-14 Technical and consumer information

Steps for determining correct
load limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s
Tire and Loading Information label.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.

Example

4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) =
650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
LTI2335
300 kg.)
Technical and consumer information 10-15

5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for your vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Measurement of weights” in this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation
pressures. For additional information, refer to “Tire and Loading Information label” in this section.

LOADING TIPS

∙ Do not load the front and rear
axle to the GAWR. Doing so will
exceed the GVWR.
WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent
it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the
seatbacks. In a sudden stop or
collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear
GAWRs. If you do, parts of your
vehicle can break, tire damage
could occur, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This
could result in loss of control
and cause personal injury.

∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.

10-16 Technical and consumer information

∙ Overloading not only can
shorten the life of your vehicle
and the tire, but can also cause
unsafe vehicle handling and
longer braking distances. This
may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury.
Failures
caused
by
overloading are not covered by
the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent
weight shifts that could affect the
balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and
weigh the front and the rear wheels
separately to determine axle loads.
Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the gross axle weight
ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle
loads should not exceed the gross
vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These
ratings are given on the vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are
exceeded, move or remove items to
bring all weights below the ratings.

TOWING A TRAILER
Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is sometimes called flat towing.
This method is sometimes used when
towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION
∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
∙ Never tow your front wheel drive vehicle with the front tires on the
ground. Doing so may cause serious
and expensive damage to the
powertrain.
∙ DO NOT tow any continuously variable
transmission vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground (flat towing).
Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

∙ For emergency towing procedures refer to “Towing recommended by
NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.

Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
To tow a vehicle equipped with a CVT, an
appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed
under the towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s recommendations when using their product.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must
conform to federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature
A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.

Technical and consumer information 10-17

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.

tor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty

WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, under-inflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and
possible tire failure.

2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your
NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you
may obtain a replacement by writing to:
∙ Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003

Temperature A, B and C

For Canada

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat, and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-

Emission Control System Warranty

10-18 Technical and consumer information

Details of this warranty may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your
NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you
may obtain a replacement by writing to:
∙ Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying
NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
request that NISSAN conduct a recall
campaign.
However,
Transport
Canada cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or NISSAN.

cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers)
or
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/SafSec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fccp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)
Additional information concerning
motor vehicle safety may be obtained
from Transport Canada’s Road Safety
Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371
or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety
(English
speakers)
or
www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere
(French speakers).
To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer
Information Centre toll free at 1-800387-0122.

You may contact Transport Canada’s
Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You
may also report safety defects online
at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/SafSec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fcTechnical and consumer information 10-19

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

Due to legal requirements in some states
and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may
be required to be in what is called the
“ready
condition”
for
an
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the
emission control system.

This vehicle is equipped with an EDR. The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain collision or near collision-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”
when it is driven through certain driving
patterns. Usually, the ready condition can
be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the
vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the I/M test, check the
vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test
readiness condition. Place the ignition
switch in the ON position without starting
the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds
and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not
blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

∙ How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
∙ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and,
∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
∙ Sounds are not recorded.

10-20 Technical and consumer information

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
collisions and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR
data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial collision situation occurs; no data
are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.
name, gender, age and collision location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine the
EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a collision investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN
dealer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be
accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or
permitted by law.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this
model year and prior can be purchased. A
Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for
your vehicle. This manual is the same one
used by the factory-trained technicians
working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be purchased.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this
model year and prior, please contact your
nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your
area, call the NISSAN Information Center at
1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.

Technical and consumer information 10-21

MEMO

10-22 Technical and consumer information

11 Index
A
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact air
bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-15
Air bag warning light,
supplemental . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-15
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation . . . . .4-16, 4-21
Air conditioner specification label . .10-12
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Air conditioner system refrigerant
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Heater and air conditioner
controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13, 4-21
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-24
Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Alarm system
(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . .2-31
Anchor point locations. . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50
Antifreeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-91
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-11
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . .5-81
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24

AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Compact disc (CD) player . . . .4-35, 4-41
FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
iPod® player operation . . . . . . . . .4-44
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Automatic
Automatic power window switch . . .2-51
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . .3-30
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) . . .2-11,
5-58

Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Bluetooth® hands-free phone system. .4-54
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-81
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-28
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-81
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Brake wear indicators . . . . . . .2-17, 8-21
Parking brake operation. . . . . . . . .5-21
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-82
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-81
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-76
Brightness control
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . .2-10
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . .
Charge warning light. .
Battery replacement . . .
Key fob . . . . . . . . . .
NISSAN Intelligent Key®
Before starting the engine
Belt (See drive belt) . . . . .
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) .

. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

. .5-91, 8-14
. . . . .2-12
. . . . .8-24
. . . . .8-24
. . . . .8-25
. . . . .5-12
. . . . .8-16
. . . . .5-22

Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Cargo
(See vehicle loading information). . . . .10-13
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-54
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
CD player (See audio system) . . . .4-35, 4-41
Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29

Child restraints . . . . . . . .1-20, 1-21, 1-23, 1-25
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Precautions on child
restraints . . . . . . . . .1-23, 1-29, 1-36, 1-41
Top tether strap anchor point
locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Chimes, audible reminders. . . . . . . . . .2-17
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4
Clock setting (models without Navigation
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34, 4-38
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-11
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-91
Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . .4-35, 4-41
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Controls
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13, 4-21
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-6
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-5
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48, 2-49

11-2

D
Daytime Running Light System . . . . . .2-38
Defroster switch
Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Dimensions and weights. . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-39
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4, 3-5
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Driving
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . .5-91
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
E
E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-78
Emergency engine shutoff . . . . . . .5-11, 6-3
Emission control information label . . . .10-12
Emission control system warranty . . . .10-18
Engine
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-12
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-6
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Changing engine oil filter. . . . . . . . .8-10
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-6
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-7

Engine compartment check
locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-5
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-92
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . .2-5
Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide). . . . . . .5-2
Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance
items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
F
First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Flashers
(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . .6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4
Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Fluid
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . .8-13
F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . .10-11
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system). . . .1-51
Front and rear sonar system . . . . . . . .5-86
Front-door pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-78
Fuel-filler door and cap. . . . . . . . . .3-26
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-26
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . .2-28
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . .5-77
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Fusible links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

Odometer . . . . .
Speedometer . . .
Tachometer . . . .
Trip odometer . . .
General maintenance
Glove box . . . . . . . .
Glove box lock . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. .2-4
. .2-4
. .2-5
. .2-4
. .9-2
.2-46
.2-46

H
Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth® . .4-54
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-35
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Heated seat switches . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Heated steering wheel switch . . . . . . .2-42
Heater
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13, 4-21
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . .4-14, 4-22
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . .5-86
HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56, 2-58, 2-59
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40

G
Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56, 2-58, 2-59
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-5
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . .5-78
Indicator
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge
indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-17
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror. . . . .3-30
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-39
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-39
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) . . . . . . .5-43
Intelligent Forward Collision Warning
(I-FCW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-65
Intelligent Key system
Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Remote keyless entry operation . . . .3-13
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
J

I
Ignition switch
Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . .5-9
Immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . .2-32, 5-12
Important vehicle information label. . . .10-11

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 8-15
K
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

11-3

Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . .8-24
Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . .3-13
Keys
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . .3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
L
Label
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12
Labels
Air conditioner specification label . . .10-12
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-11
Emission control information label . .10-12
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . .10-11
F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . .10-11
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-61
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
License plate
Installing the license plate . . . . . . .10-13
Light
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-15
Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . .8-28
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .2-10
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54

11-4

Exterior and Interior lights. . . . . . . .8-28
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-35
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-35
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-53
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . .2-55
Trunk light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-17
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
Lock
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-6
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4, 3-5
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-26
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6
Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . .3-24
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . .2-14, 2-28
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Luggage
(See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-13

M
Maintenance
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2
Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .9-4
Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .9-2
Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Maintenance under severe operation
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-39
Mirror
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . .3-30
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
N
NissanConnect® Owner's Manual . . . . . .4-2
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge
indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32, 5-12

O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . .10-5
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Oil
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Changing engine oil filter. . . . . . . . .8-10
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-7
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
One shot call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-57, 4-58
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Overhead sunglasses holder . . . . . . . .2-47
Overheat
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-12
Owner's manual order form . . . . . . . .10-21
Owner's manual/service manual order
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21
P
Parking
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-21
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-80
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system . .4-54
Power
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-80

Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Power steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Precautions
Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2
Precautions on booster
seats . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23, 1-29, 1-36, 1-41
Precautions on child
restraints . . . . . . . . .1-23, 1-29, 1-36, 1-41
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-12
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
R
Radio
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-54
FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Readiness for inspection maintenance
(I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . .5-32
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Recorders
Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . .10-7
Registering a vehicle in another
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . .3-20, 5-14
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-19
S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-6
Child seat belts . . . . . .1-23, 1-29, 1-36, 1-41
Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-19
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . .1-4
Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Seat belt
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-21
Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-12
Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12, 7-6
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-19
Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-15
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . .1-14, 2-15
Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

11-5

Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System), engine start . . . . . . . . . .2-32, 5-12
Security systems
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . .2-31
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Service manual order form . . . . . . . . .10-21
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Shifting
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Shift lever lock release . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-19
Siri® Eyes-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50
Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . .2-4
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . .2-55
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61
Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-83
Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Starting
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-12
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 8-15
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

11-6

Steering
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-80
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
Sunglasses holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Supplemental air bag warning
light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-15
Supplemental front impact air bag
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels . . . . .1-61
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44
Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-44
Switch
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Automatic power window switch . . .2-51
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-35
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-35
Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-39
Power door lock switch. . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6
Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39

T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-5
Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),
engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32, 5-12
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Tilt
Telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Tire
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4
Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 8-43
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . .10-17
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Tire pressure
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-12
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3, 6-3
Towing
4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Transceiver
HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . .2-56, 2-58, 2-59

Transmission
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Transmission shift lever lock release . . .5-19
Travel (See registering a vehicle in another
country). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Trunk access through the rear
seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6, 3-25
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . .3-24
Trunk light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39

Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . .2-32, 5-12
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-13
Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System), engine start . .2-32, 5-12
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Voice Prompt Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . .4-57
W

U
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . .10-17
USB interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Audio file operation . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Variable voltage control system . . . . . .8-16
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . .10-9
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . .5-83
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . .5-83
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-10

Warning
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-15
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . .2-11
Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-12
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . .2-28
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . .2-14, 2-28
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-53
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . .1-14, 2-15
Supplemental air bag warning
light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-15
TPMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . .2-31
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-17

Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-61
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-17
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-17
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-17
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-17
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-17
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . .10-9
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
When traveling or registering in another
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-51
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Wiper
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-34

11-7

MEMO

GAS STATION INFORMATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel
containing more than 15% ethanol.
Using a fuel containing more than 15%
ethanol in a vehicle not specifically
designed for a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol can adversely affect
the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused
by such fuel is not covered by the
NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
∙ Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using
fuel containing MMT may adversely
affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your
gasoline retailer for more details.
Note that Federal and California laws
prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage
for that region.
For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN”
For additional information, refer to “Engine
oil and oil filter recommendations” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
For additional information, refer to “Tire and
Loading Information label” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of this
manual.
The label is typically located on the driver
side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For
additional information, refer to “Wheels and
tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure
recommendations for the future reliability
and economy of your new vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Break-in
schedule” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Failure to follow these
recommendations may result in vehicle
damage or shortened engine life.

Printing : December 2017
Publication No.: OM18EA 0L33U1
Printed in U.S.A.

L33-D

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c006 80.159825, 2016/09/16-03:31:08
Create Date                     : 2017:10:25 13:36:24-04:00
Modify Date                     : 2018:01:30 10:11:23-06:00
Metadata Date                   : 2018:01:30 10:11:23-06:00
Creator Tool                    : PDFL 7.0
Document ID                     : uuid:7FFEC25584B9E7118706B03EEB1999F4
Instance ID                     : uuid:58992b2d-126e-484d-8568-63a0ad6f59a0
Derived From Instance ID        : uuid:565ec554-44f8-4b61-94ea-701264be010a
Derived From Document ID        : uuid:e5e0d32e-befc-47de-ad4d-c71ec809b93f
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 2018 Nissan Altima Sedan | Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information | Nissan USA
Description                     : Download the 2018 Nissan Altima Sedan Owner's Manual at the official Nissan USA website.
Creator                         : 
Subject                         : nissan, altima, altima sedan, sedan, 2018, owner manual, owner guide, owner’s manual, pdf, vehicle manual, maintenance, service
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 10.1.16 (Windows)
Keywords                        : nissan; altima; altima sedan; sedan; 2018; owner manual; owner guide; owner’s manual; pdf; vehicle manual, maintenance; service
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 467
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Warning                         : [Minor] Ignored duplicate Info dictionary

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

2018 Nissan Altima Sedan | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA Owner

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation